.^, 
 
 s^ 
 
 ■>. 
 
 %.>. ^-v; 
 
 IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 1.25 
 
 ■ 45 
 
 11° 
 
 2.2 
 
 
 1.4 
 
 1.6 
 
 /2 
 
 m 
 
 /I 
 
 7 
 
 'c^l 
 
 w 
 
 
 -«^ 
 
 
 <^ 
 
 PhotDgraphic 
 
 Sciences 
 
 Corporation 
 
 23 WEST MAIN SlftEfef 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 
 
 (7)6) 872-4503 
 
 ^6'^:.., 
 
 
,<i>° is. 
 
 '4^ 
 
 V..^ 
 
 i/^ 
 
 \ 
 
 CIHM/ICMH 
 
 Microfiche 
 
 Series. 
 
 CIHM/ICIVIH 
 Collection de 
 microfiches. 
 
 Canadian institute for Historical IVIicroreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques 
 
Technical and Bibliographic Notas/Notas tachniquas at bibliographiquas 
 
 Tha Instituta has attamptad to obtain tha bast 
 original copy availabia for filming. Faaturas of this 
 copy which may ba bibliographically uniqua. 
 which may altar any of tha imagas in tha 
 reproduction, or which may significantly change 
 the usual method of filming, ara checked below. 
 
 □ Coloured covers/ 
 Couverture de couleur 
 
 I I Covers damaged/ 
 
 D 
 
 D 
 
 D 
 D 
 
 D 
 
 D 
 
 Couverture endommagie 
 
 Covers restored and/or laminated/ 
 Couverture restaur6e et/ou pelliculAe 
 
 □ Cover title missing/ 
 Let: 
 
 tre de couverture manque 
 
 l~~| Coloured maps/ 
 
 Cartas giographiquas en couleur 
 
 Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ 
 Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bieue ou noire) 
 
 I I Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ 
 
 Planches et/ou illustrations an couleur 
 
 Bound with other material/ 
 RaliA avec d'autres documants 
 
 Tight binding u.^y causa shadows or distortion 
 along interior margin/ 
 
 Lareliura serrie piut causer de I'ombre ou de la 
 distorsion le long de la marge int6rieure 
 
 Blank leaves added during restoration may 
 appear within the text. Whenever possible, these 
 have been omitted from filming/ 
 II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajoutias 
 lors d'une restauration apparaissent dans le texte, 
 mais, lorsque cela 6tait possible, ces pages n'ont 
 pas Att fiimias. 
 
 Additional comments:/ 
 Commentairas suppldmantaires: 
 
 L'Institut a microfilm^ le meilleur exemplaira 
 qu'il lui a M possible de se procurer. Las details 
 de cet exemplaira qui sont paut-ftre uniques du 
 point de vue bibliographiqua, qui peuvent modifier 
 une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger una 
 modification dans la mithoda normaia de fiimage 
 sont indiquAs ci-dessous. 
 
 I I Coloured pages/ 
 
 D 
 
 Pages de couleur 
 
 Pages damaged/ 
 Pages endommagAes 
 
 Pages restored and/oi 
 
 Pages restaur6es et/ou peilicui^es 
 
 Pages discoloured, stained or foxei 
 Pages dicolordes, tacheties ou piquies 
 
 Pages detached/ 
 Pages ditachies 
 
 Showthrough/ 
 Transparence 
 
 Quality of prir 
 
 Qualiti inigale de I'impression 
 
 Includes supplementary matarit 
 Comprend du material suppl^mantaire 
 
 Only edition available/ 
 Seule Edition disponible 
 
 I — I Pages damaged/ 
 
 r~| Pages restored and/or laminated/ 
 
 r~7 Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ 
 
 I I Pages detached/ 
 
 r~yi Showthrough/ 
 
 I I Quality of print varies/ 
 
 I I Includes supplementary material/ 
 
 I I Only edition available/ 
 
 Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata 
 slips, tissues, etc.. have been refilmed to 
 ensure the best possible image/ 
 Les pages totalement ou partieilement 
 obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure, 
 etc., ont M filmdes A nouveau de fapon i 
 obtanir la meilleure image possible. 
 
 This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ 
 
 Ce document est filmi au taux de reduction indiquA ci-dessous. 
 
 1QX 
 
 
 
 
 14X 
 
 
 
 
 18X 
 
 
 
 
 22X 
 
 
 
 
 26X 
 
 
 
 
 3QX 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 y 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 12X 
 
 16X 
 
 20X 
 
 24X 
 
 28X 
 
 32X 
 
The copy filmed here has beerv reproduced thank* 
 to the generosUv of: 
 
 Seminary of Quebec 
 Library 
 
 L'exemplaire film* fut reproduit grAce i la 
 g^niroaitA de: 
 
 S^minaire de Quebec 
 Bibliothique 
 
 The images appearing here are the best quality 
 possible considering the condition and legibility 
 of the original copy and in keeping with the 
 filming contract specifications. 
 
 Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed 
 beginning with the front cover and ending on 
 the last page with a printed or illustrated impres- 
 sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All 
 other original copies are filmed beginning on the 
 first page with a printed or iliiistrated impres- 
 sion, and ending on the last page with a printed 
 or illustrated impression. 
 
 The last recorded frame on each microfiche 
 shall contain the symbol — ^' (meaning "CON- 
 TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"), 
 whichever applies. 
 
 Maps, plates, charts, etc.. may be filmed at 
 different reduction ratios. Those too large to be 
 entirely included in one exposure are filmed 
 beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to 
 right and top to bottom, as many frames as 
 required. The following diagrams illustrate the 
 method: 
 
 Les imsges suivantes ont it* reproduites avec le 
 plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition at 
 de la nettet* de l'exemplaire film6, et en 
 conformity avec les conditions du contrat de 
 filmage. 
 
 Les exemplaires originsux dont la couverture en 
 papier est imprimAe sont filmis en commen9ant 
 par le premier plat et en terminant soit par la 
 derniire page qui comporte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'illustration, soit par le second 
 plat, aeion le caa. Tous les autres exemplaires 
 originaux sont'fllmte en commenpant par la 
 premiere page qui compcrte une empreinte 
 d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par 
 la derniAre page qui comporte une telle 
 empreinte. 
 
 Un dea symboles suivants apparattra sur la 
 derniAre image de cheque microfiche, selon le 
 cas: le symbole —^ signifie "A SUiVRE", le 
 symbole V signifie "FIN". 
 
 Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent Atre 
 filmis A des taux de reduction diffirents. 
 Lorsque le document est trop grand pour itra 
 reproduit en un seul clichA. il est film* A partir 
 de Tangle supArieur gauche, de gauche h droite. 
 et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre 
 d'images nAcessaire. Les diagrammes suivants 
 illustrent la mithode. 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
TI 
 
 ORTl 
 
 PUl 
 
0, 
 
 A 
 
 • 'wm t ' ^ m ^ '^i ' "^ ^ 
 
 AH 
 
 English Spelling-Book ; 
 
 WITS 
 
 BEADING LESSONS 
 
 ADAPTED TO 
 
 THE CAPACITIES OF CHILDREN j 
 
 OALCULATXD 
 
 TO ADVANCE THE 
 
 BY NATURAL AND EASY 
 
 And to teach 
 ORTHOGRAPHY AND PRONUNiJIATIO 
 
 By LINDLE Y MURRAY ; 
 
 AUTHOm OF ^AN IM0LI8H O&AMICAS," da, ^ 
 
 QUEBEC: 
 PUBLISHED BY WILLIAM STANLEY, 
 
 no*. 22 & 23, ST. JOHK STBEST. 
 
 mmmammm^ 
 
 1857. 
 
 / 
 
" f ,-. A * 
 
 »'\ it^ ^- (S •» - s it i i ? «■■■ J • <»» ■ »< f »- « S »j-- -' » t ■» 
 
 8"aUc:;o ji'J ri a i vl f .IJ^., 
 
 
 {i't:iOA^A'> :^ii r 
 
 
 51.^. h' 
 
 >v^A7aA • 
 
 
 :" ■n'^l of hff'A. 
 
 ■^:'iAai.K>r' ' 
 
 » ^ 
 
 ;YAIffrj.k i:hKJZrj Y^I 
 
 ' '• ■..JjTMJiiU) K*U ?)!'/' V..<, •■* '^o WCtSir.'A 
 
 ) ■> r .f- r '' ^ ■ ' J \ 
 
 
 
.aiT/riT/ 
 
 ) ? 
 
 uil 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 ipABT. I. 
 
 * 8^1 ' '"rfoVf 
 
 The letters.— Easy monosyllables.— Correspondent 
 .. . reading lessons. 
 
 **iv 
 
 CHAP. 1. Lesions giring a general Idea of the long, short, middle, 
 and broad SDtmds of the vowels and diphthongs*.......... 
 
 • 2. The shork sounds of the vowels and ffiphthongs 
 
 8. The long sounds of the vowels and diphthong8...........«... 
 
 4. The middle soimds of the vowels and diphthongs.............. 
 
 6. The broad sounds of the vowels and diphthongs......... 
 
 6. Irr^ular sounds of the vowels.... i;;....ii........ < 
 
 t. Words containing consonants not sounded.,.. ...... .«..<«..• 
 
 8. Consonants of difBereut sounds..............................".—" ^ 
 
 9. Of the points or stops ,.........„.........«.......*"'"*... *® 
 
 10. Promiscuous reading lessoiii....*i."*«i.»""...».".> •••• ** 
 
 1 
 l« 
 32 
 21 
 29 
 tl 
 33 
 
 ..:.iu&n mmJk*) &» 
 
 Part. II. 
 
 
 Easy words of two and three syllables.— Appro- 
 : priate and promiscuous reading lessons. 
 
 CHAP. I. Words of two syUablfM, with the accent on the «rst sylla- 
 ble........." r .."."".." 
 
 2. Words of two syllables, with the accent on the latterqrUa. 
 ble. 
 
 46 
 
 60 
 
 3. Words of two syllables, which could not be conveniently 
 
 arranged undier either of the preceding chapters...... 66 
 
 4. Promiscuous reading lessons....^ *® 
 
 6. Words of three syUables • 83 
 
 6. Promiscuous reading lessons «" •* 
 
Ti 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Words less familiar to cMldren.-Correspondent 
 reading lessons.— Mist^Uaiieous articles.— Rules 
 
 for spelling and pronunciation. 
 :> ■ f.h\K!%<-y^-'- •■■•■-•■■■ ■■■• 
 CHAP. 1. Words of three or nwre Byllablelli...*.^ - 
 
 2. Promiscuous reading lessons 
 
 3. Names of persons and plaoes....M.««.«.*»«"" •"• 
 
 J 4. Protniaeuous reading le88on8.*.......M..M«»Yi»".— •« 
 
 6. Duties of childJfett......»««v"»**""'^*"*"*"*""' '*"* 
 
 6. figure* and nuipbert....,..^...-* .«......*.. —v"^*" 
 
 7 AblweviatiwM used in writing «nd printing... -....?•. 168 
 
 ^i Bpa^ing lessons in ItaUc, QU English, a^d M«JMi»cript . 
 ^etters..,......—!"-"*vM..f."«f"«""""""^'*^—"~*-;*" ^*^ 
 
 9, Ivrords !Bxac|l7 the same in sound, but diflwcent in spelling 
 
 and signification.... .4 ...„.«..,.... ..mm '•— " ^^ 
 
 ' IQ. Wprd^T^hiPhWPftep improperly confounded in spelling 
 
 104 
 118 
 128 
 134 
 140 
 156 
 
 or proawnpiatipUjOr both 
 
 ,.»M..»4»»»*M<««M»V*»»^»* 
 
 169 
 
 Itl 
 
 173 
 
 11. Words speUed alike, but which differ in pronunciation 
 
 and meaning ••••^••.•..•rrviv 
 
 12. Words in which the' pronunciation differs remarkably 
 
 from the spelling..... ; 
 
 13. Words which are ofteii pronounced very erroneously..... 164 
 
 14. Words in which certain terminations have exactly the 
 ,,-i(iQ / -same sbtind.:..^ ,.:ff.?..?..j«",«''vf"''Vv'"rr— r^"*" *^ 
 
 ii. Words in which the initial letters e and i, are oft«i 
 
 talsappiied......;.. ...............:..:........"...••"•••-•• "» 
 
 16. Explanation of vowels and consonants, syllables, accents, 
 
 * • «c • 
 
 lY; The sounds of the letters....:... """••••♦••"••••"••••"•••••" 
 
 is. The silent letters ............................"•....:......." 
 
 ». Bules for spelliBg...... ;..;........"..."•.....•.—• 
 
 Appendix *o.....^ ••••• — •• 
 
 186 
 201 
 207 
 224 
 
 The 
 
 A 
 J 
 
 S 
 
PA:RTt 
 
 The Letters.— Easy. monosyllablefc-Conei- 
 /i^oiidetfJ; reading l*J80iA[ '/-. H 
 
 -r a CHAPTER I,J- '/ "T fif) 
 
 Lessons giving a gener^^ i^ «^ ^"'^S 
 short, nam, and broad sounds of the voweU 
 and diphthongs. n ^- A I i 
 
 Section I. 
 
 The common al^habet.-All the ompie 
 sounds of the language explained. 
 
 A B 
 J K 
 
 S T 
 
 C 
 L 
 U 
 
 D B F Qt 
 
 ■■>um;^^X^ 
 
 M N P 
 V W X Y 
 
 a 
 J 
 
 8 
 
 b 
 
 k 
 t 
 
 ff| 
 
 d 
 
 1 
 
 m 
 
 .!*#•»?' ■ 
 
 n 
 
 a2 
 
 f S 
 
 H I 
 Q B 
 
 z 
 
 i 
 
 h i 
 
 li 
 
2 GENERAL VIEW OF 
 
 Tlie letters promisci^ously disposed. 
 
 AV BR CD CO DO^ EF 
 
 HN I^= -^^li 'KB MW GO 
 
 OQ 
 
 a'i 
 f 1 
 
 UV 
 
 bd 
 
 hk 
 
 VY PB ST XZ 
 
 bp 66 4p 
 
 ij mn • -tl ai'#' 
 
 r 
 
 nu pa ,rt ,vx 
 
 ..J'M: f^i^yo^^; 
 
 X z gy 
 
 a c, i U| and sometimesr w and y * # 
 
 The oonsonants. 
 
 b c d f g h j k 1 in li p 
 qrstvwxyz 
 
 Doubit and tnple leHers. 
 
 fl ffi ffl 
 
 J.J 
 
 
 * W and T are eonsonants when they beg^ a word or 
 tyllabk : In otiiw situations, they are vowels. 
 
THte VOWELS AND Dl!»KtHO^iGS. 3 
 
 ilie precediEg alphabet, as it » 6€«nmonly 
 pronounced, does not eowtain all the simple 
 elementary sounds ef the Englifeh language. 
 But as the learner sheuM kriaw them allf and 
 be .^We to pron6unee tbetti with facility, it is- 
 necessary that the teacher rnonlcatiB them 
 early, with the utiiiost care and exaetncss; 
 otherivise the learnfe* will J>robably never 
 pronounce them perfectly, these elements 
 ate the foundation, on whiibh the whole su-^ 
 p^rstnicture rests : the authbr has^ therefore, 
 arranged them in a Astinct 'Table, (at pages 
 6 and 6,) w^hrch he has endeavoured to make 
 as perspicuous as its iiaiportoalace demaude. 
 
 The teacher should deliberately, and with 
 great exactness, pronounce the words in this 
 Tabte, and th^ ehild should repeat them after 
 h&n, till they are tol^erably well expresBedv 
 As the sounAs only are, on this oecasidn, t6 
 bo inouleated, it is not necessary that the 
 learner should see the words. Whilst he is re- 
 peating. The nature and use of the Table 
 should, however, be fully explained by the 
 teacher, as soon as the scholar is able to com- 
 prehend the subject. 
 
4 tiBNBBAL VIEW OF 
 
 If the tutor think proper, he may, in teach- 
 ing the original sounds to his young pupil, 
 first expreBs them simply, as they are denoted 
 by the lettersi in the left-hand columu ; and 
 afterwards as they are combined with other 
 letters, in the words of the column; on the 
 right-hand. But the latter mode will be ear 
 sier to the young voice ; and will, perhaps in 
 most cases, sufficiently answer the end in ^ 
 view. Of this however, the tutor must judge. 
 The instructor will often see the use of recur?^? 
 ring to this Table, to rectify the irregular 
 pronunciation of children who have been 
 taught the original sounds, in a defective or 
 incorrect manner. ^ t *«> ' 
 
 Several of the letters in the common alpha- 
 bet, (which the child is supposed to have 
 learned,) are not enumerated in the following 
 Table; because they denote complex, not 
 simple sounds ; or because their sound is ^ig^ 
 nified by other letters. i4ff« ^ 
 
 --lii'j 
 
 m i^^it.y k^a^Lx . 
 
THE VOWELS AND ©IPHTBONGS. 
 
 Table of the elementary sounds. 
 
 1 ;■ ■, \ 
 
 Letter's denoting 
 the sknplt soondft. 
 
 A long 
 A .short 
 A iBiddlib 
 Abroad 
 
 E long 
 
 U short 
 • I long 
 I sixort 
 long 
 short 
 middle 
 
 *U long 
 TJ short 
 XJ middle 
 
 -, ». 
 
 ^i? 
 
 i VOWELS. 
 
 as beard in 
 
 as 
 
 % 
 
 as 
 
 as^ 
 
 as 
 
 as 
 
 as 
 
 as 
 
 as 
 
 as 
 
 aS; 
 
 as 
 
 as 
 
 in 
 in 
 in 
 in, 
 
 t 
 
 in 
 
 in 
 
 • 
 
 in 
 
 in 
 
 m 
 
 in 
 
 in 
 
 in 
 
 m 
 
 5^ 
 
 Words containin|p ,. 
 the simple soundi ' 
 
 i.) 
 
 TC 
 
 yl 
 .1 
 
 -/: 
 
 ale, day. 
 
 mat, bat. 
 
 *mar, bar. 
 
 all, daw. 
 
 me, bee. 
 
 met, net. 
 
 pine, pie. i r 
 
 pin, tin. « 
 no, toe> ;., 
 not, lot. 
 move, moon, 
 mule, use. ^ 
 but, nut. ^ 
 bull,fuil.t 
 
 * ''^ebng aonnds of i and ti. properly called diphthonfl 
 yoweU. ai-e, for convenience, inserted m the Table. 
 
 Ty'r IhUrious Bo^tids which ead. of ^le preceding let- 
 J. rtpr^tots. .ee p. » I , and chap. It, of Part III. i , , , 
 
aBNBBAL VIEW 0¥ 
 
 :SH, :IC 
 
 B 
 D 
 
 3? 
 V 
 
 H 
 K 
 L 
 M 
 N 
 P 
 B 
 S 
 
 z 
 
 W 
 Y 
 
 NG-' 
 
 SH 
 
 TH 
 
 TH- 
 
 ZH 
 
 'JU* 
 
 CONSONANTS. 
 
 as heard in 
 as in 
 
 as . in 
 
 as . in 
 
 ■'^f' fi\i/ 
 
 as. 
 
 as 
 
 as 
 
 as. 
 
 bM' 
 
 as 
 
 as 
 
 as 
 
 ast 
 
 a:s.' 
 
 as 
 
 as 
 
 as 
 
 as 
 
 as 
 
 as 
 
 as 
 
 as 
 
 .fj'ilie'; 
 
 m 
 m 
 in 
 m 
 
 In 
 m 
 in 
 in 
 in 
 }H 
 in 
 in 
 m 
 *1n 
 in 
 in 
 in 
 
 bat^ tub* 
 
 dog, so4. 
 for, off. 
 van, love. 
 
 go, e^g^ 
 hop, to. 
 kill^ oak. 
 lap, tall, 
 my, mum 
 nod, on. 
 
 ■4;<:.J 
 
 
 pit, map. ■ 
 rat, tar.; 
 so, lass, 
 zed, buzz, 
 top, hot^ ^ 
 wo, will. 
 
 ye, yes. 
 king, 6ing, 
 shy, ash. 
 thin, thick, 
 then, them, 
 plea^t/re. * 
 
 vn 
 
 d 
 f 
 
 g 
 
 s 
 
ff*X. 
 
 1 5 
 
 ■:% 
 
 f*- 
 
 THE VOWELS' AN» IHPBTHONGS 
 
 Hf 
 
 Some of the preceding elementary sounds 
 are nearly related to one another. The young 
 learner iivillrthi^refore, acquire a more accu- 
 rate and distinct pronunciation of them, by 
 frequently repealng words that contain those 
 allied sounds. B and p, d and t, f and v, g 
 and k, » and z, th and th, v and w, denote 
 sounds in some degree similar. ^ ^ 
 
 A The Qa^efiil eigpression of the foUowiiig 
 words, in quick, ^ succession, will effectually 
 distinguish them. Here, the scholar, as in 
 the former case,- should attentively repeat 
 
 after the teacher. . 
 
 Vi 
 
 V 1. 1 i 
 
 Of 
 
 'vt 
 
 • » 
 
 ii. 
 
 •>d 
 
 "' 5, 
 
 
 i: 
 
 Sounds to be distinguished. 
 
 ^f 
 
 Ills I 
 
 h ffom'^ as in 
 
 d from t as in 
 
 f from V as in 
 
 g from k as in 
 
 3 from z as in 
 
 ' th froni' ^ as in 
 
 y firom'W as in 
 
 bat, pat — sob, sop. 
 dip, tip— mad, mat. 
 fan, van — ^lea^^ leave, 
 gun, kin— Dog, ducfc; ^ 
 sun, z6d— kiss, buzz.«^ 
 thin, then — oath, bootii* 
 
 vine, wme. 
 
 ii^ 
 
i 
 
 8 
 
 
 / , r unuBmiMd yiBtW of i r r 
 
 ■'■I't 'to ^:K 
 
 Sb(^on ?.' 
 
 -i Syllables] apdw,oi& of iwpilfittewi *^ 
 
 . i 
 
 da de 
 
 II, : 
 
 dt: ^40 ^ da 
 
 ^y 
 
 : I 
 
 df 
 
 ^u^-ri.iigo^^ : 'gu -^''-^^m. 
 
 , ' I ! • * i i 
 
 .niciii* 
 
 ha 
 
 ja 
 
 la 
 
 ma 
 
 na 
 
 he hi 
 
 ')^iu.^iiU^ 
 
 ho hu hy 
 je ji jo ju — 
 
 le . li . .10 .. > ly 
 
 ^^dhf-u^|i . ^^ mu my 
 
 no- .-.-.-IQi' ,y .' HQa ^i; ^^^rrfuii VJ 
 
 sa. 
 va 
 
 
 J 
 
 ) ; 
 
 )9^ 
 
 ♦ to ■ .\ .fclf 
 
 »y 
 
 •W /taif VQ; 
 
 W; 
 
 ^ 
 
THE vbtvifcy ^rW ^1p Whongs. 
 
 
 
 ly 
 
 my 
 
 i^a 
 
 we 
 
 wi '' "WO 
 
 •il— 
 
 •lU 
 
 ya 
 
 ye 
 
 yi ' yo 
 
 
 KB 
 
 jjj 
 
 *ce 
 
 CI ' — 
 
 cy 
 
 ^ 
 
 ge ^ 
 
 gi '^' - 
 
 2'i_ 
 
 gy 
 
 *; 
 
 * . ^ 
 
 The toiv^l generally 
 
 tbtori 
 
 
 ab 
 
 eb 
 
 -:■ j^:i-,-... 
 
 ob 
 
 ub 
 
 ae 
 
 ec 
 
 icf' 
 
 od 
 
 t«^' 
 
 ad^ 
 
 ed 
 
 id> 
 
 od 
 
 Midt 
 
 af 
 
 ef 
 
 if 
 
 of 
 
 Uf 
 
 ag 
 
 eg 
 
 '8 
 
 ■ og 
 
 ug 
 
 
 ■]o 
 
 
 1i 
 
 ms 
 
 ak^ 
 
 6k 
 
 ik^ 
 
 <fk 
 
 ^ 
 
 al 
 
 el 
 
 n 
 
 olJ 
 
 ul 
 
 am 
 
 em 
 
 im 
 
 om 
 
 urn 
 
 an 
 
 en 
 
 in 
 
 on 
 
 un 
 
 ap 
 
 ep 
 
 ip 
 
 ^ op 
 
 ■qp ii^ 
 
 .^i 
 
 ; r .. ■ ■ ,.a 
 
 1 
 
 k *■■■'' 
 
 »'. 
 
 . ''; ! :s f ^ 
 
 (1 
 
 :n) 
 
 • Ce, ci, cy, pad ge, gi.'gy. ar« placed at the end of thi* 
 
 and the latter g«ieriaiy«D.^^^ ^^ " • ^^^ : j*^^ 
 
 ■Oi> 
 
 -.» t 
 
10 
 
 ■-. .■ :% 
 
 JIljypAL VIBW OF 
 
 h ar 
 
 er 
 
 ir of 
 
 1 as 
 
 es 
 
 is OS 
 
 at 
 
 et 
 
 it ot 
 
 ax 
 
 .ex 
 
 ix ox 
 
 Words of two letters. 
 
 The vowel generally long. 
 
 US 
 
 ut 
 ux 
 
 by 
 
 do 
 
 to 
 
 he 
 me 
 
 go 
 lb 
 
 be 
 ye 
 
 mj 
 
 ad 
 
 we 
 
 no 
 
 wo 
 
 .y . r ■ 
 
 
 The Towel short 
 
 
 
 am 
 
 if 
 in 
 
 at 
 it 
 
 of 
 on 
 
 US 
 
 ^ 
 
 i« 
 
 UE 
 
 ox 
 
 
 J 
 
 ill) 
 
 Beading lesson. 
 
 ' \ 
 
 ' ) '. '' ' 
 
 Qoup. 
 (}o in. 
 Go on. 
 
 - ► 
 An irk 
 
 Is he up? 
 So am 1. 
 Do go on. 
 
 We do so 
 Do so to 
 Do as we 
 
 • 
 
 us. 
 do. 
 
 
 ia. nr Af. »rA liiittU. & 
 
 1 WttS 
 
 wtrds, they «• prononneed doo, too, i^ Vh or. 
 
THE VO'W^BtS AND DlPHtHONGS. 
 
 /Syllables and words oitJm4^ 
 
 a 
 
 
 bla 
 
 clft^^^ 
 
 dra 
 
 position of Ibe vojpl 
 
 The Yowel %(|p^ 
 
 ble 
 bre 
 cle 
 ere 
 dre 
 
 4 
 
 bri 
 cli 
 cri 
 dri 
 
 fr?t 
 
 gra 
 pla 
 pra 
 
 » • > 
 
 fre 
 
 gle 
 
 gre 
 
 pie 
 
 pre 
 
 fri 
 
 gri 
 pli 
 pri 
 
 fro 
 
 glo 
 
 gro 
 
 plo 
 
 pro 
 
 fru 
 
 glu 
 
 'gru 
 
 plu 
 
 pru 
 
 •'; 1 ' < ' 
 
 \i i ■ ■ .'* 
 
 ply 
 pry 
 
 * Tiie syllables in this section form parts of a great 
 
 number of words in the language, and aift^id much varted 
 
 exereise to the organs of speech. ; They sh. % therefore, b^ 
 
 ' /' 1 V . XI.. 1 4^;ii v.^ i> oMa in itronounce them 
 
 with ease and distinctness. 
 
r*"i 
 
 la 
 
 i 1 sma 
 
 .1 . 
 
 sna . 
 
 the 
 
 ■■; * ^ ^ 
 
 1 ; aft ^^ 
 
 |!'J alp 
 
 n ■ aiDp> 
 
 i 
 
 r 
 
 ^ i ang . 
 
 [1 ^ 
 
 hi ant 
 
 if'' o«%4- 
 
 sme smi smo smu 
 sne sni srib snu 
 
 spe >'SiHi spo r spu 
 
 ^^b^'r0^'yr -shy lit'igky ; 
 
 '* The Tovel generally? short. 
 
 ift ii oft tnJ 
 
 ^IP t ilp Ji ; Olp t>!') 
 
 emp imp ir^ omp ji^ 
 j^ftd ,,>d .., ond i 
 
 eng 
 enk 
 ent 
 
 J?* 
 
 (tii 
 
 ink 
 Int 
 ipt 
 
 ong 
 onk 
 ont 
 opt 
 
 spy 
 
 try 
 
 ulp ] 
 ump) 
 und 
 
 unk 
 
 unt^ 
 
 upt 
 
 iixt 
 
 »; V4 
 
 arm erm 
 
 ask esk 
 
 ast est 
 
 Ann as(s 
 
 irm 
 
 isk 
 
 ist 
 
 ill 
 
 ell 
 
 onn 
 
 osk 
 
 ost 
 
 odd 
 
 inn 
 
 urm 
 usk 
 
 UStut 
 
 oflf 
 
■>i , 
 
 THB TOWBtS »X» DroWTHONGS. 1* 
 
 A fly. 
 
 >An ant. 
 An ass. 
 
 Beading lessoo. 
 
 An inn. 
 1?fee ink. 
 The«ky. 
 
 Go to Ann. 
 She is ill. 
 Is she up ? 
 
 
 My arm. 
 An egg. 
 The end. 
 
 Go an^d ask. 
 By awd by. 
 Try to do it.* 
 
 jj 
 
 i) ii 
 
 hn>Jo? ':>ii:l 6^R' 
 
 Mid nsDarrfa ienten^ft." Such Wtttwce* are theifef^ 1?rap« 
 foPtbeir early lessona. They are adapted to tbeir upderw 
 ^Btandings. and calculated to prevent a drawling manner of 
 e«reB8ion. If children are tought to repeat ^^^^ correct- 
 TL and fluency, the sentericea contained in the First Part of 
 this work,, they will be much assisted in acquiring an accu- 
 rate prdmmcMon. It is, however, proper to observe, that 
 as evert appropriate rending lesson is necessan^ confined 
 to thewords contained in the same section, or in those which 
 precede it, so Umited a scbpe for invention would not ad^t 
 of much iaste or comi*don in selecting andewNingmg the 
 ■entenoes. 
 
 oit/t* 5- 
 
 Bt 
 
14 
 
 OBNERAL YIBW OP 
 
 If 
 
 Ill'' 
 
 SBCTtON 4. 
 
 ' A sketcli of the diphthongs. * 
 
 ,v{i / 
 
 
 f) J I ._> Q ij 1 The principal dipUtlongs are : 
 
 
 ai 
 au 
 aw 
 ay 
 
 J. 
 
 AS' 
 
 *:t^«; 
 
 ew 
 
 ' r'^t It, 
 
 ey 
 oa 
 oi 
 
 00 
 
 ou 
 ow 
 
 
 ua 
 
 ue 
 ui 
 uy 
 
 Some of these diphthongs have the sound 
 of two ypwels : some, of a single short vowel ; 
 8om^ of a single middle vowel ; and otheri^ 
 :6f 4 single long or broad vowel. 
 
 jfiij ,^i 
 
 ' ■■ il. 
 
 Isi The soimd of two yowela : as, 
 
 01 
 
 oy 
 ou 
 
 *!*;? j!*!' 
 
 ow 
 
 
 in 
 in 
 in 
 in 
 
 boil 
 boy 
 out 
 
 cow 
 
 itf nUi 
 
 m:}^*iil 
 
 43^ 
 
 •^."^ V *4.'--'"'* 
 
 * A sketch of the diphthongs is placed here, for the sake 
 
 ^Jt ].~ m.^ i.>^^^V.Ao <i^11 A-wnlnirk 4-KAm 4^ ^Ka lAQI^nAV Oft 
 
 800O •• his progreflB wiU enable him to understand them. 
 
 t?l 
 
f 
 
 ue 
 ui 
 
 /.'■> 
 
 THE VOWBLa AND DIPHTHONGS. 
 2nd. The sound of a single short vowel; as, 
 
 ea in head sounds like e short; 
 
 ui in buUd: : .rfri like i s^^^*' 
 ue in guest like e short; 
 
 Iff 
 
 ' U-i X 
 
 
 jftii* »'f 
 
 ^ jf .> 
 
 Srd. iirt sound of V single middle vow«l i as, 
 
 au in aunt sounds like middle a; 
 00 in cool like "^dle o; 
 
 ooingood :"" mmiddlU. 
 
 bm'} 
 
 
 
 ik 
 
 Ji\i 
 
 4tti. The sound of a single long or broad vowel ; as, 
 
 ^^^ai in air sounds lilte a long; 
 
 -'■^iU 
 
 ay in day bi J 
 ey in key 
 eu in daub 
 
 i ■ . - 
 ^^^^mpaw 
 
 qo'ow in slow 
 
 . . - i I 
 
 s 
 
 ) ; ': ■ ■ : 
 
 1 
 
 like a long; ■ 
 like e long; 
 like a broad; 
 
 n 
 
 
. 
 
 1 ,4 >. 
 
 'V> 
 
 [Ski 
 
 
 Urn 
 
 IB' ' > '^ BHOHT SOUNDS 0»t W 
 
 CHAPTER II. 
 
 The Short Sounds of the vowels and diphthongs. 
 
 bad 
 bag 
 bat 
 
 i-'i 
 
 SECTION I. 
 
 ' » • -^ "WdrclB of three letUw, 
 
 can 
 cap 
 cat 
 
 ..if.' 
 
 had 
 has 
 hat 
 
 a 
 
 i.:Hi12 Hi 
 
 fat 
 lad 
 sad 
 
 mad 
 man 
 mat 
 
 rag 
 
 wag 
 
 wax 
 
 bud 
 bun 
 but 
 
 J ■ 
 
 bed 
 beg 
 fed 
 
 den 
 hen 
 men 
 
 get 
 
 let 
 
 met 
 
 net 
 
 set 
 
 peg 
 pen 
 
 pet 
 
 red 
 vex 
 wet 
 
 bid did fig . him 
 
 big ^m aw his 
 
 bit dim fit hid 
 
 lip 
 
 pig 
 ipin : 
 
 f 
 
 rid 
 isit 
 tin 
 
 box 
 fox 
 
 % 
 
 map pop rob , sob 
 nod pod rod isop 
 
 dog hot jiot not rot top 
 
THB V0W»L8 ANI>. DIFHTHONGS. 
 
 17 
 
 ;fef9 
 
 iti>I H'^t \v -^z 
 
 bud cup 
 bun cut 
 but gun 
 
 hum 
 ■Itug 
 ^litit 
 
 mud 
 
 fti4 
 nut 
 
 rub • sun ^M 
 run tub ■ 
 
 V-A 
 
 Beading 
 
 f lesson. 
 
 ■i-.A- -iM ' ■ 
 
 
 int'^iThe dog. 
 
 I had. 1 
 
 ■ * 
 
 A cupl-^ 
 Atop. 
 
 ' The cat.'' 
 The pig. 
 
 He has. 1 
 We can. 1 
 
 " idq^ 
 
 '^m[6 
 
 ^- ? 1. ; -. ^ 
 
 
 A bad lad. 
 A mad dog. 
 A fat pig. 
 
 , ■ f . 
 
 A red bud. 
 
 A dry fig. ; 
 
 A tin box. 
 
 He can dig. 
 I can hop. 
 
 ! ) ^ 
 
 It is hot. 
 Get my hat. 
 
 1 
 
 IrV* can run. 
 
 
 
18 
 
 SHORT SOUNDS OF 
 
 bap4 
 
 banlk 
 damp 
 
 Section 2. 
 WorcU of four Utteri. 
 
 glad 
 
 flftt 
 
 flax 
 
 land 
 
 lass 
 
 fast 
 last 
 
 ftf; t h'rJ 
 
 i^and . 
 span 
 
 bell 
 best 
 desk 
 
 dish 
 fish 
 give 
 live 
 
 fret 
 left 
 lent 
 
 ,i'- 
 
 hill 
 fill 
 k'ss 
 king 
 
 nest mend 
 restj; e,ji send 
 west , tsell 
 
 milk 
 mist 
 pink 
 ring 
 
 sing 
 silk 
 ship 
 skip 
 
 tell 
 
 w# / 
 when 
 
 spin 
 swim 
 well 
 wish 
 
 y 
 
 blot 
 doll 
 drop 
 
 fbiid 
 frog 
 from 
 
 gone 
 lor";^' 
 lotit 
 
 pond 
 shbp 
 mug 
 
 soft, 
 spot 
 stop 
 
THE VOWBL« AHX> DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 i\ 
 
 19 
 
 .»» *■ 
 
 spurn dust jump 
 dull hurt lump 
 drum hush must 
 
 tf ♦ 
 
 lum 
 
 P 
 purr 
 
 jhut 
 
 .iii-j' 
 
 spun 
 sung 
 
 « 
 
 tusk 
 
 
 ifhi 
 
 " .) 
 
 ■«i 
 
 . » r i » «. 
 
 K''!' ' , 
 
 A nest. 
 A frog, 
 A pond. 
 
 l%e king. 
 Tbe ship. 
 The desk. 
 
 I wish. 
 I s^i'p. 
 We jump. 
 
 
 iff if 
 
 A,red opot. 
 A pink sash. 
 The /'eft ^ands, 
 4 (i^sh of (Ish. 
 
 (Ring the bell. . 
 Shut the box. 
 Mend my p^n^ 
 Give, me a pin. 
 
so 
 
 » SHORT BOUNDS OP !• 
 
 ii 
 
 i)!j 
 
 I 
 
 Ji 
 
 111 
 
 t! 
 
 8;i 
 
 \ ' 
 
 ti 
 
 •I'- 
 ll 
 
 ■ *• I 
 
 I 'li ' 
 
 fc'S,' 
 
 Rff i' 
 
 Section 3. 
 
 Words of five and six letten. 
 
 glass 
 grass 
 
 smell 
 
 spell 
 
 spend 
 
 cross 
 
 tongs 
 
 strong 
 
 shall 
 
 stamp 
 
 stand 
 
 brig 
 
 brisk 
 
 drink 
 
 blush 
 
 brush 
 
 crush 
 
 bless 
 
 dress 
 
 flesh 
 
 frisk 
 
 spring 
 
 stiff 
 
 Ct'USt 
 
 grunt 
 snuff 
 
 iJi'jnf ' 
 
 .*\t(v 
 
 fresh 
 
 shelf 
 
 shell 
 
 still 
 
 sting 
 
 string 
 
 stung 
 
 strut 
 
 trunk 
 
 ,^hiUfloN Beading l«Bi©ii.« .\mi'\q A 
 
 A shell. 
 A brush. 
 
 I spell. 
 He drinks. 
 
 We stiand. 
 
 /. • 
 
 The grass. 
 The tongs. 
 A crust. : 'The shelf: . 
 
 A long string! ' Brush' my hat. 
 
 A strong man. Bring the cup. 
 
 A brisk lad. * Drink the milk. 
 
THB VOWfiLS AND DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 X, a^OtWr^ 4. 
 Words cbntidmng short diphthoDgs. 
 
 ii 
 
 
 dead 
 deaf 
 head 
 
 •it'ji 
 
 . t • : - ■ \ •■- > 
 
 been :' 
 
 blood 
 flood 
 
 u! 
 
 death 
 breathy 
 earth 
 learn 
 
 pearl 
 tread 
 spread 
 thread 
 
 U^-VJE ' '■ 
 
 • T i .- « ( 
 
 bdld 
 
 f 
 
 '^ ■-».;> 
 
 1 4^» 
 
 guilt 
 
 
 vi^fff u mm 
 
 7I> 
 
 does 
 touch 
 
 'tiiJli 
 
 Beading lesson. 
 
 said 
 says, 
 guesii 
 friend 
 
 t^'ffi*^. 
 
 quill 
 
 1 vi.' 
 
 iiit 
 
 ! 
 
 ^i 
 
 youi 
 sconrge 
 
 The earth. 
 A friend^ 
 
 I i t *i'*. 
 
 I guess. ■ 
 
 • rr lii ' 
 
 We leattT.^ 
 
 A deaf man. \ 
 AdeadjBy. ' ^I 
 A young frog* 
 A crust of bread. 
 A bit of tltiread, 
 AloligqUin. " 
 
p 
 
 t 
 
 
 r ! > . 
 
 I '' 
 
 If 
 
 H 
 
 i; 
 
 '■ 
 
 ■ r 
 
 ■A' 
 
 5 In 
 
 
 1^1 '< 
 
 Pi" 
 
 CHAFTEK 3. 
 The LONCi 80iJNp8 of the vowels And diphthongs. 
 
 / 
 
 Section 1. 
 
 YoTf eU toj diphthongs like ft In 
 
 ale. 
 
 D 
 
 gave 
 air 
 
 nail 
 tail 
 
 ^^ 
 
 iT 
 
 James 
 clay 
 
 day ,,,. 
 
 hay 
 
 gain 
 
 gray 
 
 hair 
 
 hast^, 
 
 make 
 may 
 
 way 
 play 
 say 
 
 r-'n 
 
 take r 
 
 tap^. : 
 
 grape 
 
 break 
 
 frail 
 snail 
 
 It lacosi, .11 .'I) i-. 
 A great caik^. , 
 
 TfaikecaiieL 
 M^d^h^. 
 Mky T go ? 
 St^bypie. 
 
THE vo>;^*iLS il*iif li^ii^ft'fHONas, 
 
 99" 
 
 Section 2i 
 
 Vowels and dipl^tkongs like « ia m«. 
 
 Eve 
 
 nn; 
 
 ear 
 eat q^ 
 east 
 
 pea 
 
 tea 
 
 dear 
 
 fear 
 
 leaf 
 
 neat 
 
 ' >i 
 
 la 
 
 m!M; 
 
 .»i.j 
 
 vn*' 
 
 she 
 
 read 
 
 bleat 
 
 clean 
 
 mean 
 
 leave 
 
 sheaf 
 
 shear 
 
 •n 
 
 .,tj."i 
 
 here 
 steal 
 wheftt 
 
 bee - 
 
 see 
 
 J. nil* 
 
 feedj 
 
 keep 
 tree 
 
 these 
 
 • • 
 
 week 
 geese 
 green ;b 
 sheeg^ 
 sleep . 
 sweet 
 •leeve 
 field 
 
 »> 
 
 ■ f ^» 
 
 speak , 
 
 squeak; weed"*' piece 
 
 •.;.[ 
 
 .U>by~ol '^-11 
 
 A green field. 
 A sweat pea- 
 A sheaif of wheM. 
 A: ifkie^e ^f btesid. 
 Aci^ofiett;^^ ■ 
 
 1L 
 
 The sheep bleat^ 
 The pigs sq^uea^ 
 Bfere is a befe. 
 Feed the gefeie; 
 

 1 
 
 
 f 84 
 
 J 
 
 
 11 
 
 1 
 
 I 
 i 
 
 LONO SOUNDS OF 
 
 SiBGTION 3* 
 
 Vowels and diphthongs like i in pine. 
 
 li k 
 
 I 
 
 i 
 
 ii 
 
 '!! 
 
 ice 
 
 bite 
 
 dine 
 
 fine 
 
 fire 
 
 line 
 
 die 
 lie 
 
 U'J;. 
 
 1 
 
 
 kind 
 
 kite 
 
 like 
 
 mice 
 
 mild 
 
 mind 
 
 pie 
 rie 
 
 nice 
 
 rice 
 
 ripe 
 
 side 
 
 time 
 
 wine 
 
 tie 
 
 blind 
 wipe 
 shine 
 smile- 
 quite 
 spice 
 
 buy 
 
 iK^h 
 
 njff 
 
 vie 
 
 eye 
 
 i; 
 
 31 
 
 l>fl 
 
 Reading lesson. 
 
 A sweet smile. 
 A nice pie. 
 A ripe plum. 
 A glass of wine. 
 
 A VkliviA mort 
 
 A kind friend. 
 
 The. sun shines. 
 It is a fine day. 
 Bring the line. 
 Fly the kite. 
 It is time to read, 
 I hke ta read; 
 
' 'O ! 
 
 THB 
 
 VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 2^ 
 
 old 
 cold 
 goldyfu 
 hold 
 
 coat 
 load 
 road 
 roar 
 
 Section 4. 
 
 Voweli aud diphtiiongs lik« o in 
 
 roll 
 
 no. 
 
 home 
 
 hope^ 
 mole 
 most r 
 
 cloak 
 toast /f«? 
 door 
 floor 
 
 <" 
 
 i«.i 
 
 rose 
 told 
 tone 
 
 low • 
 mow 
 blow 
 crow 
 
 bone 
 stone 
 smol^e 
 stroke 
 
 grow 
 show 
 snoW; 
 sew 
 
 Eeatoiglewon. 
 
 A hot roll. 
 A red cloak. 
 A sweet rose. 
 
 A load of liay.; 
 A bad rbai 
 
 A clean ^^°^' 
 
 Shut the door. 
 The fire smokfas. 
 
 It is a coli day. 
 It snows fist. ^ 
 
 Bring «iy<^ I 
 
 C2 
 
26 
 
 
 LONG SOUNDS OF 
 
 use 
 
 cure 
 
 duke 
 
 cue 
 due 
 hue 
 blue 
 
 Section 5, 
 
 Yovels and diphthongs like u in mtUe, 
 
 fume 
 
 lute 
 
 mule 
 
 dew 
 clew 
 few 
 mew 
 
 iM 
 
 
 mute 
 
 pure 
 
 puke 
 
 new 
 pew 
 blew 
 flew 
 
 tube 
 tune 
 plume -^ 
 
 slew '^^ > 
 ewe 
 
 lieu > 
 view 
 
 Reading lesson. 
 
 The sky is blue. 
 The cat mews. 
 The mule frisks. 
 
 nniiA riAtv i*Ao#i 
 
 rfk AAV A«V TT r « \fVt\*» 
 
 .M<rr 
 
 In a few weeks, I hope 
 
 to read well. 
 I will make the best 
 
 M0V VA AUjr VAUAV* 
 
 J*. 
 
 »4'' 
 
THB VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 27 
 
 CHAPTER 4. 
 
 i'.rt 
 
 Ji t * *» ' T 
 
 i: 
 
 The MIDDLE sounds of the vowels and 
 
 diphthongs.* 
 
 • 
 
 like a in 
 
 bar. • 
 
 * 
 
 ii/m 
 
 are - 
 art 
 bark 
 dark 
 
 cartvre 
 card 
 
 far Mt 
 hard • 
 
 hariii ff 
 lark 
 larger n 
 star 
 
 part 
 tart 
 sharp 
 smart 
 
 haunt 
 aunt ' 
 
 jaunty 
 guard!, 
 
 heart 
 hearth 
 
 launch 
 
 ♦ ■ ■ 
 
 * ' haunch 
 
 9 - -• « ■ 
 
 ' Like in wow. ., : 
 
 • 
 
 lose ^ 
 move 
 
 prove 
 who 
 
 whom 
 whose ' 
 
 do 
 '^ Ebme 
 
 ,■- -1 mu 
 coo 
 
 noon 
 
 broom 
 
 shoe 
 
 coolyi i 
 
 poor 
 
 goose 
 
 ; you7r 
 
 * We bave' found it convenient to arrange the o in mmt 
 ^ongBt the middle sounds of the vWels ; and as Its sound 
 is longer than o in not, and rattier shorter than o in no, we 
 presume Uie arrangement is allowable. 
 
 amo 
 
\ i 
 
 : i 
 
 If* 
 
 I i 
 
 Si I \ 
 
 ■ ^ 1 
 
 P4 
 
 3 1 - J 
 
 
 
 
 "j 
 
 
 
 
 2^' 
 
 too 
 
 food 
 
 mooii 
 
 bush 
 
 push 
 
 book* 
 
 cook 
 
 hook 
 
 MIDDLE SOUNDS OF 
 
 root shoot 
 
 room spoon 
 
 sboh 
 
 Like u in &u2/. 
 
 full 
 
 pull 
 
 look 
 
 rook 
 
 took 
 
 '.;i. 
 
 puss 
 
 put 
 
 good 
 
 hood 
 
 stood 
 
 true 
 fruit 
 your 
 
 bull 
 
 foot 
 
 wood 
 
 wool 
 
 x 
 
 Good fruit. 
 A fat goose. 
 A poor rook. 
 A dark room, 
 I hurt my foot, i 
 I lost my shoe. 
 Is it true ? 
 Who said so ? 
 Look at File. 
 
 Reading lesson. . v .,,,«.. 1 
 
 The full moon. 
 
 it.TfUrtf? 
 
 The dog barks. 
 The bull roars. 
 Puss purrs. 
 Put by the stool. 
 Do not push me. 
 Wbose book is it ? 
 I shall soon learn 
 to spell. 
 
 * in the prbnmiciaCion given to these Vo^ds, the author is 
 supported by Nares, Sheridiui, and the practwe of the best ^ 
 spealcers. 
 
THE VOWBt«,A^P ?J??P?^°^°^- ^< 
 
 CHAPTER 5. 
 
 The BBOAD Bounds oiiie vowels and 
 diphthonga.*,, 
 
 SfiCtlON 1. 
 Vowels and dipbthongs Uke a ia dl 
 
 N 
 
 lifv 
 
 ball 
 
 call 
 
 fall , 
 
 daub 
 fault 
 gauze 
 caw 
 
 ?KVA 
 
 salt (oK 
 dam - 
 paw jjo(| 
 raw ^ 
 saw 
 
 "warnL/o:t 
 wart ; ro 
 
 false ^j , 
 
 claw^.rr^,! 
 
 dramioii^ 
 
 «ii r 
 
 1 '■ I ! 
 
 scald; 
 small 
 swairm 
 shawl 
 
 straw j^, 
 
 broad^ 
 
 George 
 
 lawn t;, J? 
 crawl A 
 
 {{.eading lesson. 
 
 A soft ball. A straw hat. 
 
 A broad band. ' "Atallman. 
 
 A gauze cap. Ay^^'f^^' 
 
 The rooks caw. '^TJiesnowMs 
 
 The snaUs crawl.,, ,.>Iy ball ->^^^^ 
 Puss has sharp claws. Jho calls ipe? 
 
 . v„weU and dipbtW««<»W«^^*''^'"'"*^'^*^* 
 the tonniot broad « or we prop« dipMueng*. 
 
I ^< 
 
 ^ 
 
 :n' 
 
 BiioAb ^OtNDi 6v 
 
 I 
 
 I'i 
 
 Hi 
 
 1 .J J 
 
 i- V ' 
 
 '11 
 
 I" 
 
 tipi 
 
 
 !'.;.-. 
 
 ' / / V ' .' .> r 
 
 riLll'j 
 
 SSGTIOM 2- 
 
 Proper diphthongB in M^^h h6ik \k6 vowels are sounded ; 
 oi and oy, as in boy j ouoBcdoWf as in caw. 
 
 oil 
 
 joy 
 
 thou 
 
 ground 
 
 boil 
 
 toy ■" 
 
 cloud 
 
 cow 
 
 moist 
 
 our 
 
 1 k f 
 
 found ' 
 
 how 
 
 noi^6 
 
 ■■ out '?•;>' ■ 
 
 house 
 
 now 
 
 spoil 
 
 loud 
 
 mouse 
 
 owl ^''♦' '''^ 
 
 voice 
 
 shoiit '*' 
 
 f 
 
 pound 
 
 growl 
 
 bo;^ 
 
 sour '"^ 
 
 round 
 
 dowri 
 
 C017 
 
 ' ' floui''«'''J 
 
 • it' ". ; 1 
 
 sound 
 
 gown 
 
 
 (f fi' If Eesldiiig lesson. 
 
 rr. f 4*.. , * 
 
 * l^HbW do you do? 
 
 Sit down. Read to ine. 
 
 Now leave your books. 
 
 Do Mt iiiake a; lioise. 
 v,d^ Owls fly in the dark. 
 
 Moles live in the grouM. 
 
 • . « r 
 
THR VQWBI^S ANP piPHTWONOS M 
 
 CHAPTER 6. 
 
 Wor4»,in which the Vowels deviate froni the 
 sftupds they have in the scale at page $.* ^ 
 
 4 like sl^ot^ )n ;ii<)J 
 
 ^as wash want 
 
 
 dirt 
 shirt 
 
 birth 
 mirth 
 
 wast wasp what 
 
 ' JKke « ibort , 
 
 '■';■• 
 
 , *. 1 
 
 flirt first 
 
 spirt stir 
 
 ^iiike e ibort ^ 
 
 firm girl 
 
 O like t* abort, !,;i i: 
 
 bird 
 squirt 
 
 skirt 
 
 •Tl 
 
 come 
 done 
 dove 
 
 .*i:o 
 
 U" 
 
 glow 
 
 r ' 
 
 ttomo 
 
 work 
 none .:.;-i wotd- >'■' world 
 
 .onnd. of them io the .cale. l,ate1««i^..*rVed for »dl.bnct 
 appropriate chapter; thatfllft^flP-g le«™f ""8^ "ot be 
 W»ea>tU the various M di»«of'i»»» powe«.of th, 
 Tolreh Mepded blether. " . .^ ni « SioiSs i^ii* 
 
'!l 
 
 ii^' 
 
 I"' 
 
 H^:: 
 
 I 
 
 32 
 
 IftRBOULAR SOUNDS OF 
 
 <,f ■ . 
 
 like a broad. 
 
 (iord 
 lord 
 cork 
 
 crude 
 rude 
 
 i ; '. ,' ■ 
 
 *There 
 
 fork 
 
 horse 
 
 storrn 
 
 bom 
 corn 
 horn 
 
 for 
 nor 
 short 
 
 
 U like middle o. 
 
 rule 
 brute 
 
 where 
 
 prude 
 prune 
 
 yes 
 
 
 ■i'il>i>: Beadiog lesson. 
 
 truce 
 spruce 
 
 her 
 
 'is 
 
 Has Ann done her work? 
 
 Yes she has. 
 
 She is a good girl. I love her. 
 
 I have been ilL Come to me. 
 
 Give me some drink, ouv.;^ 
 
 I love to learn; Where is my book ? 
 
 Piatshalllread? "^'^'^'" 
 
 
 '^!i, 
 
 
 and short u in htr. 
 
tHE VOWELS AND Dl^Bl^nONaS. 33 
 
 CHAPTER 7. 
 Words containing consonants not sounded. 
 
 Section 1. 
 
 Words with sikat cpusonanta, the vowel or dipUhong 
 having the short or the middle sound. 
 
 b silent 
 
 k 
 
 ^ cock 
 
 half 
 
 lamb 
 
 back 
 
 clock 
 
 calm 
 
 limb 
 
 black, 
 
 mock 
 
 could ; 
 
 dumbf ^ 
 
 quack 
 
 duck 
 
 should 
 
 thumb, 
 
 neck 
 
 knit , 
 
 would 
 
 crumb 
 
 pick . 
 
 knot 
 
 w . 
 
 g 
 
 sick 
 
 knock 
 
 wrap 
 
 gnat 
 
 trick 
 
 
 wrist 
 
 gnash 
 
 quick 
 
 calf 
 
 wrota^ 
 
 
 Read 
 
 1 i ■ 
 
 ing lesson; 
 
 
 A fat calf. 
 
 4.4''>r!'^ ' 
 
 Pick up 
 
 the crumbs; 
 
 A hard knot. . ^ 
 
 Who knocks at the 
 
 The ducks 
 
 ; quack. 
 
 door? 
 
 
 The cock 
 
 crows. 
 
 Ann should learn to 
 
 'i'he gnats 
 
 bite, 
 
 knit and sew. 
 
1^ 
 
 34 
 
 SILENT CONSONANTS. 
 
 Section 2. 
 
 "Word* Tntt silent consonants, the yowel or diphthong 
 haying the long or broad sound. 
 
 I'i 
 
 b silent 
 
 knead 
 
 fight 
 
 bought 
 
 i * 
 
 climb 
 
 1 
 
 light 
 
 ought 
 
 1 
 
 • 1 
 
 comb 
 
 talk 
 
 might 
 
 thought 
 
 l.\ 
 
 g 
 
 walk 
 
 night 
 
 bough 
 
 j-l 
 
 sign 
 
 stalk 
 
 sight 
 
 plough 
 
 ( ' 
 
 reign 
 
 yolk 
 
 thigh 
 
 dough 
 
 
 gnaw 
 
 folks 
 
 eight 
 
 though 
 
 
 k 
 
 gh 
 
 neigh 
 
 w 
 
 ■i 
 
 knife 
 
 high 
 
 straight 
 
 write 
 
 r 
 
 know 
 
 sigh 
 
 caught 
 
 wrote 
 
 T 
 
 III. 1 
 
 knee 
 
 bright 
 
 taught 
 
 sword 
 
 I 
 
SILENT CONSONANTS, 
 
 36 
 
 Beading lesson. 
 
 A new comb. 
 A sharp knife. 
 A high wall. 
 A fine sight. 
 
 A bright star. 
 A light night. 
 The horse neighs. 
 The dogs fight. 
 
 The bough of a tree. 
 The stalk of a rose. 
 The yolk of an egg. 
 Dogs gnaw bones. 
 Jane kneads the 
 
 dough. 
 George ploughs the 
 
 field. 
 
 Puss can climb trees. 
 I know how to read. 
 I wish I could write. 
 Come let us walk. 
 What o'clock is it. 
 
 It is eight o'clock. 
 
 I thought so. 
 
36 CONSONANTS Qt DIFFERENT SOUNDS, 
 
 
 Elti 
 
 His;, H I 
 
 CHAPTER 8. 
 
 Consonants, single and double, 
 different sounds. 
 
 Section 1. 
 
 Single consonants, 
 c hard like fc. 
 
 which have 
 
 cash 
 crab 
 cane 
 call 
 
 dance 
 dunce 
 lace 
 place ^ 
 
 glad 
 grin 
 
 gem 
 
 Ml 
 
 crttm -*^ 
 curd r 
 
 cold 
 cool 
 
 clash 
 cling 
 creep 
 crawl 
 
 pence 
 fence 
 
 e soft like «. 
 » » 
 
 Uew 
 
 "H'' A.' 
 
 since 
 prince 
 nice cease 
 
 price ■: , piece 
 
 , . g bard. 
 
 gasp . ; glass 
 gust grass 
 
 scar 
 scum 
 count 
 cro\yn 
 
 hence 
 whence* 
 juice At 
 , voice, „ 
 
 grand . 
 griiht 
 
 s 
 
 soft. 
 
 gin 
 
 age 
 
 hedge 
 
t}©KSOMANTS OF DWFBBBNT SOUNDS, ZT. 
 
 « tliarp. 
 
 sand 
 send 
 seed 
 side 
 
 dress 
 gloss 
 haste 
 waste 
 
 bricks 
 tricks 
 goose 
 straw 
 
 nurse 
 purse 
 seat 
 sweel 
 
 •v->iril 
 
 t flat like z. 
 
 his 
 hers 
 keys 
 tease 
 
 rags 
 ribs 
 hares 
 wares 
 
 birds 
 doves 
 pears 
 praise 
 
 beds 
 heads .W 
 please -t 
 croaJts n 
 
 Reading lesson. 
 
 Jane has made ^ nice I hope I shall not 
 
 plum tart. 
 Take a piece of 
 it. 
 
 be a dunce. 
 Bricks are made of 
 clay. 
 
 George gave me a Glass is made of 
 
 book. 
 I am glad I can 
 it. 
 
 sand. 
 
 t)f grapes, 
 d2 
 
38 CONSONANtS 09 DlWfiRBNT OVk^v 
 
 ii 
 
 ill 
 
 
 '1 
 
 4Vf 
 
 3 ; 
 
 ri.f 
 
 W 
 
 S'.-Jl 
 
 
 Section 2; 
 
 - 
 
 
 Double consonants 
 
 
 
 th ebarp. 
 
 
 thank 
 thiuk 
 three 
 throne 
 
 thick breath 
 thin r health 
 throw teeth 
 throat mouth 
 
 cloth 
 thing 
 north 
 south 
 
 
 ^l/ii ih&d. 
 
 an 
 
 thaa 
 then 
 thej^ 
 theirs 
 
 this that 
 thus . them 
 these thy 
 those thine 
 
 eh like tch. 
 
 baths ^^ 
 paths ' 
 clothes 
 smooth 
 
 (Jjbarl^* ' 
 chargie 
 chair 
 child 
 
 ^chlti ' tnuch 
 chick such 
 cheese coach 
 ehoi6e couch 
 
 tifch 
 which 
 peach 
 reach 
 
 iU 'J^'-u^ii 
 
 ch like ih. 
 
 
 inch 
 pinch 
 
 bench I tench > 
 bunfch ' stench . 
 
 French 
 chaisb 
 
CONSONANTS Ofr b!i"FERENT SOUNDS. 39 
 
 ch like k. 
 
 chart 
 
 chasm 
 
 scneine 
 
 rough 
 tough 
 
 gh and ph like /. 
 
 cough phiz 
 
 *-''laugh phrase 
 
 ^j;u.^ . .. 
 
 R^^ding lesson.. . , . 
 
 school 
 
 nymph 
 soph 
 
 : j^ t J vj - / ■» . 
 
 Clean youi? tfeeth* 
 Wash your mouths. 
 Then your breath 
 
 will be sweet. 
 Do not throw stones. 
 Come in. 
 Reach a chair. 
 Take some bread and 
 
 cheese. 
 
 Who gave you these 
 
 pears? 
 James gave them to 
 
 us. 
 Thank him for them. 
 I have a fine peach and 
 
 a bunch of grapes. 
 I will give you some 
 
 of them.* ^ ,^., 
 
 ■;ft h'j. 
 
 (I 
 
 -. c.. ^4. ^»«. 0R4 fhfl observations on tlw jiropriety of^ 
 the Uaruer'. BpeUing the appropriate reading le8.<m.. a. 
 ftxercisOT "off the book. 
 
40 
 
 THE POINTS. 
 
 I' 
 
 
 !, i:i 'n 
 
 IP 
 
 mk 
 
 CHAPTER 9. 
 
 Of the points and notes used in composui 
 
 sentences. 
 
 A comma is marked. ....... .thus , 
 
 A semicolon thus ; 
 
 A colon thus : 
 
 A period, or full stop .thus . 
 
 A note of interrogation. ... .thus ? 
 
 A note of admiration. thus ! 
 
 A parenthesis. ....thus ( ) . 
 
 Pauses in reading. 
 The learner should stop, 
 
 at the comma, till he could count..one ; 
 
 at the semicolon, till two ; 
 
 at the colon, till ■• • ..tnree 
 
 at the period, till ...four. 
 
PROMISCUOUS BEADING LESSONS. 
 
 41 
 
 •U Joii oil 
 
 CHAPTER 10. 
 
 
 Promiscuous :^eadiiig Lessons- 
 
 ■ ,.■ ' '<•■■■,. » 
 
 \ ' .bii Section 1. 
 
 Breakfast. 
 
 The sun shines. 
 
 It is time to get up. 
 
 Jane, come and dress Charles. 
 
 Wash his face, and neck, and make him 
 
 quite clean. .. ■ ^ ^ * • 
 
 Comb his hair. Tie his frock. 
 Now, Charles, we will go down stairs. 
 Fetch that stool. Sit down. 
 Here is some milk; and here is a piece 
 
 of bread. ■*■' 
 
 JQo not spill the milk. ; - . > 
 
 'Hold the spoon in the right hand, 
 This is the right hand. 
 fvur. ..i,c< ;« Viara ! do not leave it; sop 
 
 it in the milk. ,u^i»a ' 
 
42 
 
 PROMISCUOUS 
 
 P 
 
 
 f.'.Ht. 
 
 1.^ 
 
 Ik •), 
 
 Do not throw the bread on the floor. 
 
 We should eat bread, and not waste it. 
 
 There is a poor fly in the milk. 
 
 Take it out. Put it on this dry cloth. 
 Poor thing! It is not quite dead. It 
 moves; it shakes its wings; it wants to dry 
 them : see how it wipes them with its feet. 
 
 Put the fly on the floor, where the sun 
 shines. 
 
 Then it will be dry and warm. 
 
 Poor fly ! I am glad it was not dead. 
 
 I hope it will soon he well. 
 
 Section 2. 
 
 Puss. 
 
 Where is puss? 
 
 There she is. 
 
 Do not pull her by the tail : that will 
 hurt her. 
 
 Charles does not like to be hurt: and 
 puss does not like to be hurt. 
 
 I saw a boy hurt a poor cat ; he took hold 
 
READING L '.SSONS. 
 
 43 
 
 of her tail : so she put out her sharp claws, 
 and made his hand bleed. 
 
 Stroke poor puss. 
 
 Give her some milk. 
 
 Puss likes milk. 
 
 Now that Charles is so kind to her, she 
 will not scratch, not bite him. 
 
 She purrs, and looks glad. 
 
 Section 3. 
 Reading. 
 
 Come to me, Charles. Come and read. 
 
 Here is a new book. 
 
 Take care not to tear it. 
 
 Good boys do not spoil their books. 
 
 Ipeak plain. 
 
 lake pains, and try to read well 
 
 Stand still. 
 Do not read so fast. 
 Mind the stops. 
 What stop is that. 
 
i ; 
 
 i4 PROMISCUOUS 
 
 Charles has read a whole page now. 
 . This is a page. This is a leaf. 
 A page is one side of a leaf. 
 Shut the book. ' Put it by. 
 Now give me a kiss. 
 
 hn:' 
 
 
 "♦■i 
 
 
 m 
 
 III: I 
 
 mi 
 
 >^rr .h 
 
 ^^ in, 
 
 1^1 ^ 
 
 • SEtitroN 4. 
 
 Bain. 
 
 Shall we walk? 
 
 No, not now. ' I think it will rain soon. 
 • Look how black the sky is ! 
 
 Now it rains ! How fast it rains !' ' 
 
 Rain comes from the clouds. 
 - The ducks love rain. . 
 
 Ducks swim, and geese swim.* " 
 
 Can Charles swim? 
 
 No. Charles is not a duck nor'jr^obse; 
 so he must take care not to go too near the 
 pond, lest he should fall in. I do not know 
 that we could get him out; if we could not, 
 he would die, 
 
 
 ii . i 
 
READING LESSONS. 
 
 45 
 
 When Charles is as big as James, he 
 shall learn to swim. 
 
 Section 5. 
 
 A walk. 
 
 It does not rain now. 
 
 The sky is blue. 
 
 Let us take a walk in the fields ; and see 
 the sheep, and the lambs, and the cows, 
 and trees and birds. 
 
 Call Tray. He shall go with us. 
 
 He wags his tail. He is glad to see us, 
 and to go with us. . 
 
 Stroke pour Tray. 
 
 Tray likes those who stroke him, and 
 feed him, and are kind to him. 
 
 Do not walk on the grass now. It is too 
 high, and is quite wet. 
 
 Walk in this smooth, dry path. 
 
 There is a worm. Do not tread on it. 
 
46 PROMISCUOUS 
 
 ! what a large field. 
 
 This is not green. It is not grass. 
 
 No ; it is corn. It will be ripe soon. 
 
 Bread is made of corn. 1 dare say 
 Charles does not know how bread is made. 
 Well, some time I will tell him. 
 
 Now let us go home. 
 
 Shall we look at the bees in their glass 
 
 hive? 
 
 Will the bees sting us ? 
 
 No ; they will not sting us, if we do not 
 tease, nor hurt them. 
 
 Wasps will not sting us, if we do not 
 
 hurt them. 
 
 There is a wasp on my arm. 
 
 Now it is gone. 
 
 It has not stung me. 
 
 If :l 
 
 fi:;i 
 
 Section 6. 
 
 [Dinner. 
 
 Xne ciuiJiSk. Bwiiv^iJ. 
 
 It is time to go in, and dine. 
 
READING LBSSONS. 
 
 47 
 
 Is the cloth laid ? 
 
 Where are the knives, and forks, and 
 plates? 
 Call Ann. 
 
 Are your hands clean ? 
 Sit down. 
 Do not take the broth yet ; it is too hot : 
 
 wait till it is cool. 
 
 Will you have some lamb, and some 
 
 peas? 
 Do not smack your lips, or make a noise, 
 
 when you eat. 
 
 Take some bread. Break the bread : do 
 
 not bite it. 
 
 I do not put the knife in my mouth, for 
 fear I should hurt my lips. Knives are 
 sharp : they are to cut with, and not to put 
 in one's mouth, or to play with. 
 
 Jane must shake the cloth out of doors. 
 
 ,The birds will pick up the crumbs. 
 
 Now let us go and play with George. 
 
48 
 
 READING LESSONS. 
 
 
 hm 
 
 i'#T 
 
 Section 7. 
 
 The poor blind man. 
 
 There is a poor blind man at the door. 
 
 He is quite blind. He does not see the 
 sky, nor the ground, nor the trees, nor men. 
 
 He does not see us, though we are so 
 near him. A boy le&ds him from door to 
 
 door. 
 
 Poor man? 
 
 ! it is a sad thing to be blind. 
 
 We will give the blind man some bread 
 and cheese. 
 
 Now he is gone. 
 
 He is a great way off. 
 
 Poor blind man ! 
 
 Come in Charles. Shut the door. 
 
 1 wish the poor blind man had a warm 
 house to live in, and kind friends to 
 take care of him, and to teach him to 
 
 work. 
 
 Then he would not beg from door to 
 
 door. 
 
PAKT II. 
 
 T^a^v words of two and three syllables. Ap- 
 tro^aTe and promiscuous reading lessons.* 
 
 CHAPTER 1. 
 
 Words of two syllables with the accent on 
 
 the first syllable.t 
 
 Ab sent 
 ac cent 
 bad ness 
 flan nel 
 gra vel 
 
 Section 1. 
 Both the syllables short. 
 
 pack thread 
 Nap kin 
 ac tive 
 bab ket 
 blan ket 
 
 branch ed 
 cab bage 
 pas sage 
 stand ing 
 rag ged 
 
 diviBions, has the corr^p leading word 
 
 t„ththe8yUable..soundedexaotyj^like. m^^^ 
 
 which determine, the pronm«aU.n of Ae daw w 
 helong.. is ^^^^^;XtaX^^^^" ««-«-*»' 
 
 19, page BiO» 
 
 •2 
 
Miitl 
 
 fl 
 
 ! 60 
 
 i 
 
 ACCENT oii 
 
 
 .{ ! 
 
 / 
 
 Mat ter 
 
 ver min 
 
 chii dreil 
 
 
 after 
 
 Ches nut 
 
 cyg net 
 
 'ii i 
 
 an ger 
 
 beg gar 
 
 Shil ling 
 
 » 1 
 
 an swer 
 
 bet ter 
 
 build ing 
 
 ^ 
 
 back wards 
 
 en ter 
 
 ci vil 
 
 1 , 
 
 chap ter 
 
 * J 
 
 e ver 
 
 chick en 
 
 » ' 
 
 chat ter 
 
 fea ther 
 
 fi nish 
 
 J ■ 
 
 da mask 
 
 le mon 
 
 kit chen 
 
 ill ■ 
 
 ga tlrcr 
 
 let ter 
 
 Ii nen 
 
 
 lad det" 
 
 me ton 
 
 mis chief 
 
 }tlm/w't. , S '> 
 
 ra ther 
 
 ne ver 
 
 sing ing 
 
 JH 
 
 sam pier 
 
 pep per 
 
 swim ming 
 
 IH 
 
 Bel man 
 
 sel dom 
 
 ti mid 
 
 liw 
 
 break fast 
 
 Shep herd 
 
 wick ed 
 
 f '^' 
 
 phea sant 
 
 tem per 
 
 Hie kup 
 
 
 plea sant 
 
 ten der 
 
 bit ter 
 
 ■ I' '' 
 
 ser vant 
 
 wea ther 
 
 din ner 
 
 1': 
 
 Bless ing 
 
 Brick bat 
 
 fil bert 
 
 r 
 
 cer tain 
 
 dis tance 
 
 fin ger 
 
 
 bed ges 
 
 in fant 
 
 ri ver 
 
 rWf 
 
 learn ing 
 
 in stant 
 
 scis sors 
 
 
 self ish 
 
 111 ness 
 
 ail ver 
 
 L , 
 
 ser vice 
 
 in sect 
 
 sis ter 
 
 §! 
 
 whet ting 
 
 in step 
 
 twit ter 
 
 1 
 
 
 > 
 
 
 whi tl 
 
 win te 
 
 Cob V 
 
 know 
 
 non s< 
 
 ob jec 
 
 Bob I 
 
 gos lii 
 
 bori n 
 
 cot ta 
 
 live 
 
 ram 
 
 pro n 
 
 quar 
 
 ro bii 
 
 stock 
 
 squat 
 
 Aba 
 Afii 
 Plea 
 Goo< 
 A c( 
 A^ 
 
THE FIRST SYLLABLE, 
 
 5% 
 
 whi ther 
 win ter 
 Cob web 
 know ledge 
 non sense 
 ob ject 
 Bob bin 
 gos ling 
 boa net 
 cot tage 
 live 
 range 
 pro mise 
 quar rel 
 ro bin 
 stock ings 
 squat ting 
 
 Con duct 
 bios som 
 cob bier 
 com mon 
 doc tor 
 pro per, 
 pros per 
 scho lar 
 Mus lin 
 cur tain 
 no thing 
 nurs es 
 pu nish 
 some thing 
 sul len 
 tur nip 
 wor ship 
 
 Mur mur 
 bro ther 
 CO lour 
 com fort 
 flut ter 
 fur ther 
 buck ster 
 hus band 
 mo ther 
 num ber 
 o ther 
 puck et 
 sto mach 
 suffer 
 sum mer 
 sup per 
 thun der 
 
 Reading lesson. 
 
 A basket of figs. A huckster sells fruit 
 
 A fine melon. 
 Pleasant wea;ther. 
 Good children. 
 A cold winter. 
 A M^arm cottage. 
 
 and cakes. 
 A cobbler mends 
 
 shoes. 
 Linen is made of 
 
 Sax,.. 
 
Id 
 
 ;.i 
 
 'b 
 
 if|M:!i 
 
 
 Vf 
 
 Baby 
 dai ly 
 dain ty 
 dai ry 
 dai sy 
 fair ly 
 hai ry 
 has ty 
 gra vy 
 lady 
 late ly 
 la zy 
 pa stry 
 rai ny 
 safe ly 
 
 ACCENT ON 
 
 Section 2. 
 
 Both the ff/llables long. 
 
 scarce ly 
 va ry 
 Hail stone 
 may pole 
 rain bow 
 sa go 
 
 scare crow 
 where fore 
 Clear ly 
 dear ly 
 drea ry 
 ea sy 
 fee bly 
 gree dy 
 grea sy 
 
 lea ky 
 mea ly 
 neat ly 
 nee dy 
 slee py 
 sweet ly 
 wea ry 
 Kind ly 
 bright ly 
 fine ly 
 high ly 
 ivy 
 like ly 
 live ly 
 migh ty 
 
 
 • It is proper, in th» place, to observe, that the long and 
 the short yowels. have degrees in their length andshortaess. 
 If therefore, the vowels classed as long ones, m many of %. 
 syllables, should not be deemed so long as they are .n otter 
 Xcumsta^cea, they may nerertheless ^ P~P«rfy ~""f J" 
 
 .* . 1- T« « -n-nrlr nf thlS Kind, it WOUlCl 
 
 «»rt AB snecitic lone vowels, a** « " 
 
 ^plJkstoad of informing the learner, U tiie aeverl tu- 
 
 mi ry 
 
 spicy 
 
 tidy 
 
 tiny 
 
 Bony 
 
 cro nj 
 
 glorj 
 
 holy 
 
 home 
 
 riatio 
 The 1 
 learn 
 Bhou] 
 
THE FIRST SYLLABLE. 
 
 53 
 
 mi ry 
 spicy 
 tidy 
 tiny 
 Bony 
 cro ny 
 glo ry 
 holy 
 home ly 
 
 low ly 
 most ly 
 no bly 
 on ly 
 po ny 
 poul try 
 ro sy 
 slow ly 
 smo ky 
 
 BeadiDg lesson. 
 
 story 
 whol ly 
 Beau ty 
 duty 
 duly 
 fu ry 
 new ly 
 pure ly 
 su rely 
 
 A sweet baby. 
 A tidy girl. 
 A dairy maid. 
 A lazy boy. 
 A rainy day. 
 A long story. 
 
 Charles is a lively 
 
 boy. 
 The rainbow has 
 
 fine colours. 
 The robbin sings 
 
 sweetly. 
 
 Hation, in t.e long and t., shoH ^o^ds ^^^^- 
 
 ThA »itaation of the aoeent, -wiU, m most oaaes, 
 
 i;;;ner; «. U, &. precise lengtl. ^hieh ev«y .o«b vu„,. 
 Bhould have. 
 
i 
 
 r-A 
 
 
 ; 1 
 
 
 
 04 
 
 ACCENT ON 
 
 Section 3. 
 
 The first syllable short, the second long. 
 
 Alley 
 an gry 
 car ry 
 hap py 
 Mer ry 
 cher ry 
 ve ry 
 a ny 
 ma ny 
 en vy 
 plen ty 
 ear ly 
 hea vy 
 rea dy 
 Bel low 
 fel low 
 
 mea dow 
 yel low 
 there fore 
 
 Silly 
 filthy 
 pi ty 
 pret ty 
 quick ly 
 Pil low 
 prim rose 
 wi dow 
 win dow 
 Body 
 cof fee 
 CO py 
 sor ry 
 
 Bor row 
 fol low 
 hoi low 
 swal low 
 Tur key 
 dus key 
 fur ry 
 hun gry 
 sul try 
 stu dy 
 
 ugly 
 
 ho ney 
 mo ney 
 mon key 
 coun try 
 jour ney 
 
 Heading lesson. 
 
 The bull bellows. Bees make wax and 
 
 The monkey chatters. 
 The swallows twitter. 
 The turkey struts. 
 
 honey. 
 How 
 
 meadow* smell. 
 
 
 ,' ti 
 
"X 
 
 THE FIRST SYtLABLB. 
 
 Sectiom 4. 
 
 The first syllable long, the second short. 
 
 55 
 
 Blame less 
 
 care less 
 
 pa rent 
 
 pave ment 
 
 Pa per 
 
 dra per 
 
 fa vour 
 
 neigh bour 
 
 tai lor 
 Feel ing 
 be ing 
 creep ing 
 hear ing 
 freez es 
 glean ing 
 mean ing 
 
 peel ing 
 pier cing 
 Fe ver 
 read er 
 reap er 
 ei ther 
 nei ther 
 Blind ness 
 bright ness 
 kind ness 
 qui et 
 silent 
 
 Li on 
 
 bri er 
 
 ti ger 
 
 tire some 
 
 vi al 
 *wi ser 
 Oro cus 
 glow worn^ 
 old er 
 o ver 
 
 whole some 
 Pew ter 
 hu mour 
 
 tu mour 
 
 tu tor 
 
 Mu sic 
 
 fuel 
 
 gru el 
 
 jew el 
 
 stu pid 
 
 Raading leeson. 
 
 The lion roars. Tailors make 
 
 The tiger growls. clothes. 
 
 Paper is made of Drapers sell 
 
 rag 
 
 cloth. 
 
 «?• 
 
0^6 
 
 1.1 n 
 
 4^i' 
 
 accent on 
 Section 5. 
 
 The middle sounds of the vowels and diph- 
 thongs. 
 
 Art less 
 dark ness 
 harm less 
 har vest 
 scar let 
 Char ming 
 arch ing 
 card ing 
 
 The second syllable short. 
 
 car pet 
 far thing 
 mar ket 
 par tridge 
 spark ling 
 Fa ther 
 gar ter 
 lar ger 
 
 mas ter 
 par lour 
 Fool ish 
 bloom ing 
 choos es 
 stoop ing 
 do ing 
 cru el 
 
 The second syllable long. 
 
 Gloo my Bui ly ' 
 
 roo my ful ly 
 
 smooth ly pul ly 
 
 ru by woo dy 
 
 « rude ly wool ly 
 
 Beading lesson. 
 
 A field of barley. A kind master. 
 
 A fine harvest. A good father 
 
 A charming walk* A blooming boy. 
 
 A green carpet. A foolish trick. 
 
 Army 
 bar ley 
 par sley 
 part; ly 
 laun dry 
 
 Wall 
 al ter 
 au tui 
 daugl 
 draw 
 hal t€ 
 sau C" 
 
 n- 
 Gau 
 
 haugl 
 
 naug 
 
 pal t) 
 
 A cij 
 A pi 
 Acl 
 A nj 
 
 take t 
 
 ,11' 
 'I 
 
 ?'4. 
 
 i'* 
 
THE FiRST SYLLABLE. 
 
 Section 6. 
 The broad sounds of the vowels 
 
 61 
 
 Wal nut 
 al ter 
 au tumn 
 daugh ter 
 draw er 
 hal ter ' 
 sau cer 
 
 
 ♦; .1 
 
 and diphthongs. 
 
 Tlie second syUable shorti^''^' ^^ ^^ ^^ ^^ 
 
 wa ter 
 warm er 
 or der 
 or chard ! 
 Cowslip 
 clown ish'* 
 foun tain 
 
 The secoad syllable long. 
 
 moun tain 
 tow el 
 Coun ter 
 floundet^^ 
 flow er 
 show er ' ' 
 cow Ard ^ 
 
 
 Gau dyr. 
 haugh tyci 
 naugh ty ^ 
 pal try 
 
 sau cy .,,, 
 for ty ,(| 
 lord ly «T| 
 stor my h? 
 
 Beading LedsoH. 
 
 Bonn ty 
 clou dy ; 
 drow sy 
 proud ly? 
 
 A Clip and saucer. 
 A pretty, flower. 
 A clpudy day. 
 A naughty boy. 
 
 Get some cowslipsi 
 ^ ^''Water the plant^.^^ 
 A mountain ji§ a 
 very high hill. 
 
 *• Vowels and dipnmongs "^^ ««^x^ci ^r-.^--, — ^ 
 
 take the sound of broad a, or are proper dipbthon^ji.^,^ . . . ^. 
 
 F 
 
gs 
 
 •^'•^kceteNT tiH 
 
 BBCTtON 7. 
 
 Words in which the vowel of the latter sylla- 
 ; ble is mute, or scarcely perceptible. 
 
 ff til > ••: ;:.•,' .l»7l '■? ?* 
 
 Th« firit vowel ehort. 
 
 ■)i I 
 
 it 
 
 /' 
 
 an ole 
 cao kle 
 call 41e 
 daz zle 
 han die - 
 fas tefei 
 hap pett 
 
 rat^e 
 
 Gtti tfe "^I 
 
 ket tie 
 
 les son 
 
 iaeti cfle 
 
 net tte 
 
 ^eb blfe 
 
 pet soft 
 
 hea ven , 
 
 reckon !*> 
 
 Little 
 
 kin die 
 
 gi veti 
 
 lis teti 
 
 pri son 
 
 mid die 
 nirii ble 
 •ic kle H 
 sm gle 
 thim ble 
 •^^his tie 
 
 • y^rin kle 
 
 < > 'ift 
 
 Bot tie 
 coc kte 
 gob ble 
 cot ton 
 often 
 sof ten 
 Buc kle 
 buA dle^^ • 
 crdm ble 
 dou ble 
 do zen 
 glut ton 
 .purple 
 Sho Vel 
 tfott We ■ 
 ■ ■ /. 
 
 mm 
 
 mi 
 
 
 w«r« writlfcwjf ftPt>t 1»P i*^ 
 
THE FIRST SYLLABLE. 
 
 » 
 
 Able 
 ba con 
 ba sin 
 era die : 
 fable 
 ma 80iu^ 3 
 ta ken 
 rai sin 
 ra ven 
 stable 
 table uio 
 
 Needle 
 ea gle 
 e ven 
 - e vil 
 peo pie 
 rea son 
 sea son 
 stee pie U 
 trea cfe 
 Bi ble 
 bri die 
 
 7 
 
 fright en 
 light ea 
 ri pen 
 idle ^^^ 
 trifte 
 Na Uc 
 bro ken 
 cho sen 
 fro sen 
 open 
 woven 
 
 Reft^ing Iqmoo. 
 
 An idle girl. 
 A nimble boy. 
 A little child. 
 A black pebble. 
 A sweet apple. 
 A doubly daisy. 
 
 ^ 
 
 I 
 
 The goose cackles. 
 The turkey gobble^ 
 The raven croaks. 
 Open the door* 
 Snuff the capdles. 
 Do not tlrouble me* 
 
60 
 
 •"^•^^ AccBrrf'6A '^ 
 
 a t 
 
 ■ ^ 
 
 Ji 
 
 CHAPTER 2. 
 
 Words of two syllables, with the accent on the 
 
 latter syllable. , , 
 
 Section 1. 
 
 Both the syllables short. 
 
 ex pect 
 ne gleet 
 per verse 
 them selves 
 Dis tress 
 him self 
 
 it self 
 
 in tent 
 
 in vent 
 
 Dis turb • 
 
 in dulge 
 
 Reading lesson. 
 
 Wt^^^tftia^ clone Be coptent^^wi^h 
 
 wrong, confess it^. 
 Try to excel ptl^er^ in 
 
 learning. . /r 
 Bo not affront me. 
 
 At tend 
 a mend ' 
 at tempt 
 la ment ^^ 
 again ' 
 a gainst 
 Ab surd 
 af front ^^' 
 a mong 
 a mongst 
 Ex eel 
 
 in struct 
 in trust * 
 Con fess 
 con sent 
 con tent • 
 of fence 
 pos ses8^s^' 
 Sub linit i 
 un fit 
 un til 
 un twist 
 
 what you have. 
 Attend to what the 
 
 master says. 
 
THE SECOND SttLABLB. 
 
 ^ 
 
 Be have 
 de dare 
 pre pare 
 re late 
 delay ^^ 
 re frain. 
 re main j 
 Se rene 
 8(B vere ^ 
 be lieve 
 be tween 
 de ceit 
 
 Section 8. 
 Both the syllables long. 
 
 de ceive ^' 
 re ceivei 
 re peat 
 
 Be bind 
 be sides 
 de light 
 di vide 
 de ny 
 de mn 
 de sire 
 re mind 
 re quire 
 
 HI 
 
 a) 
 
 ■if 
 
 ■ V. 
 
 • ' ■ " /. 
 
 Before 
 be hold ^ 
 be lo# ^ 
 re pose 
 re store ^. 
 Mo rose 
 pro pose 
 pro voke 
 De mnre 
 pre same 
 re bukf 
 re fuse 
 
 Behave well. 
 
 .L 
 
 r 
 
 ReadiBg lessoo. 
 
 Do nob provlote 
 Think before you speak, anybody- /^ 
 Do as your parents de- Deceive no om^ 
 sire you to do. Agoodbbydelightt 
 
 Viia fi4endl* 
 
 
 f2 
 
m 
 
 ,njn 
 
 AGjCBNT ON 
 
 ■•h 
 
 Y% 
 
 
 A wake 
 ac 
 
 a ftaid 
 a way^ .. 
 Ad mire 
 alive 
 a rise 
 ar rive^ *'^ 
 man IfLind 
 Adore [i 5 
 
 a go ; 
 
 af ford 
 a lone 
 A btise 
 
 Section 3. 
 
 The firft syllable short, the second 
 
 - ac euse 
 a mjse >h 
 tra duce 
 Em brace 
 ex -plain 
 main tain 
 per suade 
 Dis grace 
 mistake^ 
 dis dain 
 mis laid 
 Dis creet 
 dis please 
 in de.ed 
 
 - 0^1 
 
 Reading lesson. 
 
 long. 
 
 sin cere 
 Dis like •' 
 dis guise 
 in cline ,^- 
 in quii?e .. 
 in vite . 
 Un kind 
 un ripe 
 un tie 
 sur pris^ 
 Sup pose 
 sup port 
 un bolt 
 un known 
 
 Unripe fruit is not 
 
 wbblesome. 
 Awake, it is tune to 
 
 get up. y-v.'MyzAk 
 IPUie dog barks, be^ 
 
 I 
 
 not aifraid.t • 
 
 ,1 
 1 1 
 
 Bees will not sting us, 
 
 ifweletth^ififtlonc. 
 
 Go away now, but 
 
 oi cbme again. - ^ ^' 
 
 T>_ ^l-~>*^«.*k •<♦* oil : vmt 
 
 say or do. q*>^^ 
 
 hM 'i. 
 
THB SECOND SYLLABLE. 
 
 m 
 
 Section 4. 
 
 Tbe first syllable long, th^^ seeond short 
 
 ' pre tend 
 pre vent 
 re fresh 
 re gret 
 re spect 
 re quest 
 Be gin 
 de si3t 
 re sist 
 re build 
 Be long 
 
 De camp 
 re pass 
 re past 
 se dcin 
 Be fend 
 
 d^'peild 
 
 de serve 
 
 di rect 
 
 di veft 
 
 pre fer 
 
 pre serve 
 
 Come, begin 
 
 work^'-' ' - 
 Goon. Now you have 
 
 done enough. 
 To whom does this 
 
 book belong?' 
 To Charles. He lent 
 
 it to us. -^ ^ 
 
 be yond 
 re solve 
 re volve 
 Be turn 
 be come j 
 e nough ^ 
 pre judge 
 Fo ment 
 fore tell 
 pro fess 
 pro tect 
 
 Reading lesson. 
 
 your 
 
 iBq oil 
 
 nr 
 
 We must return it 
 
 to him. 
 James is not well. 
 We must try to 
 
 divert him. 
 He deserves favour. 
 
 I respect and love 
 
 hittii '^ 
 
64 
 
 ACCENT ON 
 
 Section 5,. 
 
 The middle sounds of the vowels and 
 diphthongs. 
 
 A larm 
 a part 
 Dis arm 
 dis card 
 Em bark 
 en large 
 
 The firot syHable short 
 
 ap prove 
 
 ba boon 
 
 ■'1 
 
 bal loon 
 dra goon 
 rac koon 
 
 shal loon 
 
 l:> 
 
 ■ « ; t f ■ 
 
 J i 
 
 Dis prove 
 im prove 
 in trade 
 Buf foou . 
 un do 
 un truth 
 
 i> 
 
 The first syllable long. 
 
 De part JRe move 
 
 be hoove 
 
 be calm 
 re gard 
 re mark 
 
 H 
 
 re prove 
 re cruit 
 
 Reading lesson 
 
 The work is ill done : To depart, is to go 
 
 undo it. away from a place. 
 
 Try to improve. To embark, means 
 
 Never tell an untruth, to enter a ship-. 
 
THB SECOND s'^-'^^ABLE. 
 
 ^^5 
 
 s Section 6. 
 
 Th0 broad sounds of the vow^| fl^d ^ 
 ' dipWhongs. 
 
 The first syllable sbort. 
 
 iW fl>^' 
 
 A dorn 
 abhor 
 a broad 
 ap plaud 
 Ex hort 
 ex tort i 
 per form^' 
 
 if 
 Be cause 
 
 de fraud. . 
 
 de form 
 
 re call 
 
 re ward 
 
 In form 
 mis call 
 with draw 
 A noint 
 ap point 
 a void 
 A bout J 
 
 ac counts 
 aloud 
 -'^'■^ low 
 a round 
 En joy 
 em ploy 
 em broil 
 
 r"- 
 
 ,v^*^ 
 
 
 The first syUahle long, 
 
 3q coy,, J 
 de stroy ^ 
 re coil -. 
 rejoice^ 
 rejoin ^ 
 
 E^iadiDg lesson. 
 
 De vour 
 de vout 
 re Bounce 
 re nown 
 ye^sQUud 
 
 That^boy is happy, be- 
 cause he is good. 
 
 He performs his work 
 quickly and well. 
 
 Shall we go abroad 
 
 to-day 
 
 Read aloud, but 
 
 not too loud. 
 Take care to avoid 
 
 a singing tone. 
 .^ _i. __!-^«n fV»a 
 
 words. 
 
^6 
 
 IRRKGULAR WORDS. 
 
 CHAPTER 3. 
 
 Dissyllables which could not conveniently 
 be arranged under either of the prece- 
 ding chapters.* 
 
 V' ll!;' 
 
 Section 1. 
 
 
 '.'■•'''■■.■ 
 
 ;'i Containing 
 
 a number of them differently 
 
 ■■.. 
 . ■■ ■ , 
 
 accented. 
 
 
 J^/t Accent oa the first syllable. 
 
 
 ^m Can not 
 
 bot tom 
 
 fear ful 
 
 ^m rag man 
 
 sor row 
 
 fe male r 
 
 ^m ^ thank ful 
 
 cur rants 
 
 cry ing 
 
 ^m spar row 
 
 hunts maji 
 
 i ron 
 
 ^B emp ty 
 
 some tinges 
 
 light ning 
 
 H^ help less 
 
 up per 
 
 li lach 
 
 H^ lei sure 
 
 ut most 
 
 ri ses 
 
 ^m - plea sure 
 
 work house 
 
 wri ting 
 
 ^m sen tence 
 
 care ful 
 
 mo ment 
 
 ^1 chil blain 
 
 grate ful 
 
 mourn ful 
 
 ^1 in to 
 
 ta king 
 
 no tice 
 
 ^m wis dom 
 
 crea ture 
 
 ro ses 
 
 ^W >Yo men 
 
 cheer ful 
 
 use ful 
 
 <• The wor^ m this chapter could pot be omitted^ a* they 
 are coutained ia ibe subaequeDt reading lescouB. They »ro 
 avmnged vi'iik as muek regai'd to pronuo<;iatioEi, m thek 
 Tariety would admit 
 
gar den 
 par don 
 spar kle 
 bush esH (ill 
 cue koo 
 look ing 
 pud ding 
 su gar 
 wood en 
 
 as sist .^ 
 fa tigue 
 com mand 
 con fine 
 in crease 
 with in 
 witii out 
 
 iRRlEGtJLAIl WORDS. 
 
 wo man 
 wors ted 
 ai most 
 al so 
 al ways 
 fail en 
 for tune 
 for wards 
 mom ing 
 
 67 
 
 hor ses 
 scorch es 
 tor ture 
 talk ing 
 walk ing 
 hou ses 
 out side 
 loi ter 
 noi sy 
 
 Accent on the second syllable 
 
 u pon 
 un less 
 pur sue 
 per haps 
 her self 
 be come 
 fire side 
 
 o blig^ 
 bey 
 pro vide 
 for give 
 for get 
 our selves 
 your selves 
 
 Reading lesaon. 
 
 1 love to hear the My parents provide 
 
 cuckoo. 
 How sweet the 
 
 garden smells ! 
 Lilachs are pretty 
 
 trees. 
 
 many things for me, 
 I should always be 
 
 grateful to them. 
 I will obey their 
 
 V 
 
 
 I 
 
 Roses are very sweet. 
 
ea 
 
 ^Qii 
 
 Section 2. 
 
 Coptaining Words ending in ed. 
 
 nnr 
 
 1st. Sueh as are pronounced as one syllable. 
 
 beg ged 
 swell ed 
 fledg ed 
 kill ed 
 liv ed 
 mov ed 
 prov ed 
 crown ed 
 drown ed 
 
 d having ita usual sound. 
 
 lov ed i 
 rubbed 
 scrub bed 
 pray ed 
 rais ed 
 sa ved 
 call ed 
 warm ed **^^ 
 form ed 
 
 < I 
 
 ask ed -^^'^T 
 hatcb ed 
 scratch ed 
 thatch ed 
 thrash ed 
 press ed 
 dress ed 
 perch ed 
 stretch ed 
 
 pleas' ed 
 seal ed 
 seem ed 
 bri bed 
 ti red 
 mow ed 
 show ed 
 mu sed 
 u sed 
 
 d souaded like f. 
 
 fix ed 
 
 mix ed 
 
 miss ed 
 
 wish ed 
 
 whip ped 
 
 cross ed 
 
 drop ped 
 1 J 
 
 lock ^4 
 
 nurs ed 
 work ed 
 , placed; 
 ra ked 
 scorch ed 
 talk ed 
 reach ed r 
 
 ed 
 
 ■>■ vn?' 
 

 IRREGULAR WORDSu 
 
 2d. Such as are pronounced as t 
 
 dread ed 
 
 ha ted 
 
 mend ed 
 
 sha ded 
 
 tempt ed 
 
 tast ed 
 
 ffild ed 
 
 wait ed 
 
 sift ed t ] 
 
 wast ed 
 
 last ed 
 
 ■ feast ed 
 
 pat ted 
 
 seat ed 
 
 card ed 
 
 treat ed 
 
 cart ed 
 
 mind ed 
 
 par ted 
 
 slight ed 
 
 
 Reading lea8C>p. 
 
 69 
 
 as two syllables.* 
 
 fold ed 
 load ed 
 mould ed 
 roast ed 
 scold ed 
 count ed 
 shout ed 
 pound ed 
 halt ed 
 want ed 
 
 James has thatched 
 his little cottage. 
 
 He has worked hard 
 to-day. 
 
 He is very much tired. 
 
 He should be kindly 
 treated. 
 
 The hen has hatch- 
 ed some very 
 pretty chickens;^ 
 
 We counted more 
 than a dozen. 
 
 We were all much 
 pleased with them. 
 
 * See the rule when ed is to oe proootinced as a diBtinol 
 syllable, and when not. Part III. Chapter 18. 
 
 G 
 
70 
 
 PROMISCUOUS 
 
 CHAPTER 4. 
 
 irromiscuous reading lesson?. 
 
 Section 1. 
 
 Hay making. 
 
 Hark! what noise is that? It is the 
 mower whetting his sithe. ' He is going to 
 cut down the grass, and the pretty flowers. 
 The sithe is very sharp. Do not go too near 
 
 * Come into this field. See all the grass 
 is cut down. There is a great number of 
 men and women with their forks and rakes. 
 They toss, and spread, and turn the new- 
 mown grass. Now they are making it into 
 opcks. How hard they work! Come, 
 let us help to make hay. 
 0! it is very hot. 
 No matter ; we must make hay while the 
 
 sun shines. How sweet the hay smells ! 
 
 When the hay is quite dry, it must be made 
 
 into stacks. — 
 
 XT ;« 4?^t. cli/iOT^ anrl r»nws^ and horses, 
 
 to eat in winter, when grass does not grow. 
 
 iu? 
 
r 
 
 RBADiNU Lessons. 
 
 71 
 
 Section 2, 
 
 Thunder and ligbtning. 
 
 There has not been any rain for a great 
 while. The ground is very dry, and hard. 
 The grass does not look green as it used 
 to do. It is brown : it is scorched by the 
 sun. If it do not rain soon, we must water 
 the trees and flowers, else they will die. ^ 
 
 The sun does not shine nowt but it is 
 very hot. It is quite sultry. There b no 
 wind at all. The leaves on the trees do 
 not move. The sky looks very black ; and 
 how dark it is! Ha! what a bright light 
 shone through the room ! Now it is gone. 
 It did not last long. What was it? It was 
 
 lightning. 
 
 Lightning comes from the clouds. 
 
 Now it lightens again 
 
 What a noise there is in the air, just over 
 
 our heads. 
 
 That is thunder 
 
 How loud the thunder is ! 
 
 It begins to rain ! what large drops. 
 Now it rains very fast. 
 
72 
 
 promiscuol's 
 Section 3. 
 
 Harvest. 
 
 The storm is over. It Is very pleasant 
 now. It is not so hot as it was before the 
 rain came, and the thunder, and the light- 
 ning. How sweet the flowers smell ! The 
 trees, and the hedges, and the grass, look 
 fresh and green. 
 
 Let us go into the fields to see if the corn 
 is ripe. Yes, it is quite brown : it is ripe. 
 There are the reapers, with their sharp 
 sickles. They are cutting down the 
 
 corn. 
 
 This is a grain of corn. This is an ear 
 of corn. What grows upon a single stalk, 
 is called an ear. The stalk on which the 
 corn grows, makes straw. This bundle of 
 corn is called a sheaf. This is a shock. 
 There are many sheaves in a shock. 
 
 When the corn is dry, it must be taken 
 to the barn, to be thrashed. Then it must 
 be sent to the mill, to be ground. When 
 it is ground, it is called flour. 
 
 There are some little boys and girls 
 ^;^ir;«o. nr. oong nf oorvi Thev are fflean- 
 ing. There is a poor old man gleaning. 
 
READING LESSONS. 
 
 73 
 
 Hfe is very old, indeed. His hair is quite 
 white. His hands shake. He is almost 
 too old to work; but he does not like to 
 be idle. He has come a great way to pick 
 up a few ears of corn ; he is very much 
 tired with walking about the fields, 
 and stooping. He hr ; dropped one of his 
 little bundles of corn. Take it up and 
 carry it to him. Speak kindly to the 
 poor old man. Now let us pick up a 
 few ears of corn for him. Take them to him. 
 They will help to make a loaf of bread tor 
 
 him. 
 
 Section 4. 
 
 The Partridge. 
 
 Hark ! there is a gun let off; and a bird has 
 dropped down, just at our feet. Ah. it is 
 blooL Its wing is broken. It cannot fly 
 anyf/rther. Poo° thing! how i* /otters ! It 
 is going to die. Now it does not stir. It is 
 
 '^''marbirdisit? ^tis a partridge. There 
 is a man with a gun in his hand. He is co- 
 ming to fetch the partridge. Now he has let 
 off his gun again. He has shot a very pre ty 
 bird indeed. It has red, and gr_^en, and pur- 
 r.U feathers. What a fine tail it has ! ihis 
 bird Vs'a great deal larger than a partnage. 
 It is a pheasant. 
 
 G2 
 
74 
 
 PllOMJSCUOU» 
 
 Section 5. 
 
 The Orchard- 
 
 Let us go into the orchard. The apples 
 are ripe. We must gather them. Fetch 
 that little basket. There is a man in that 
 tree. He will gather all the apples that 
 grow on those high branches. Do not 
 climb up the ladder. Gather the apples 
 that are on the ground. 
 
 Look at those poor little girls standing at 
 the gate. They want to come in. They 
 wan', some apples. Their fathers and mo- 
 thers have no fields, nor orchards, nor gar- 
 
 -lens. 
 
 Poor little girls ! Shall we give them some 
 
 apples? , 
 
 Yes, fill that basket with fine ripe apples, 
 and give them to the little girls. ! now 
 they are glad. How hindly they thank 
 us ! They are gone home. Perhaps they 
 will give some of their apples to their 
 fathers and mothers, and little brothers and 
 sisters. 
 
READING LESSONS. 
 
 7/5 
 
 Section G. / 
 
 * 
 
 The Robin. 
 
 Scrape your shoes. Do not bring any 
 
 dirt in the room. 
 
 Come in. If your hands are very cold, 
 rub them ; if you hold them to the fire, you 
 will have chilblains, which are very pamtul 
 
 indeed. 
 
 Shut the window, Ann. ^ 
 
 Ha! tlere is a pretty little robin flying 
 about the room. We must give him 
 something to eat. Fetch some bread tor 
 him. Throw the crumbs on the floor. 
 
 Eat pretty robin, eat. ^ 
 
 He will not eat: I believe he is atraid ot 
 us. He looks about, and wonders where 
 lip 1^ 
 
 Oi he begins to eat. He is not afraid 
 now. He is very hungry. ^ . ' ,, 
 
 How pretty it is to see him pick up the 
 crumbs, and hop about upon the floor, the 
 table, and the chairs. Perhaps, when he 
 is done eating, he will sing us a song. 
 
 T?,,4. «r« rrinof nnt 1cppt> him here always. 
 
16 
 
 t>ROMlSCUOtJS 
 
 Birds do not like to be shut up in a room, 
 or in a cage. They Uke to fly about in 
 the air, and to pick up seeds and worms 
 in the fields, and to hop about on the grass, 
 and to sing perched upon the branches of 
 high trees. And in spring, how busy they 
 are building their nests, and taking care of 
 their young ones. 
 
 Robin has flown against the window: 
 he wants to get out. Well, we will open 
 the window, and, if he chooses, he may fly 
 
 away. 
 
 There, now he is gone. 
 
 When he is hungry, he may come again. 
 We will give him some more crumbs. 
 
 Section 7. 
 The Seasons. 
 
 It is winter now, cold winter. It freezes. 
 The pond is frozen, and the river is frozen. 
 We can walk upon the river now. Do not 
 be afraid ; the ice is very thick, and hard. 
 There is a man skating; and there are some 
 
 boys sliding. __ 
 
 It snows. How fast it snows ! We cannot 
 
 see the 
 
 road. 
 
 and th 
 
 Snow 
 
 Brii 
 
 it meli 
 
 thing 
 
 and tl 
 
 is on 1 
 
 into t 
 
 Wl 
 
 come 
 
 there 
 
 great 
 
 bloss( 
 
 andt 
 
 and { 
 
 and 1 
 
 of ha 
 
 nests 
 
 cuck 
 
 are i 
 
 er. 
 
 ^^ 
 
 The: 
 long 
 
HEADING LESSONS. 
 
 77 
 
 see the grass, nor the gravel walk nor the 
 road There is thick snow upon the trees, 
 and the hedges. How pretty the snow is ! 
 Snow come from the clouds. 
 
 Bring some snow to the fire. See, how 
 it melts ! It is all gone now : there is no- 
 thing but water. When the sun shines 
 and the weather is warmer, the snow that 
 is on the ground will melt; and it will sink 
 into the earth as the rain does . _ 
 
 When winter is quite over, spring wii 
 come again. 0, spring is very pleasant! 
 there will be daisies, and cowslips, and d 
 great many pretty flowers; there will be 
 blossoms and green leaves upon the trees 
 and there will be young lambs, and chickens 
 and goslings. The birds will smg swee ly . 
 and they will be very busy picking up bits 
 of hay, and moss, and wool, to build their 
 nests with : and the cuckoo will s"\S «"c^\°°' 
 cuckoo. The days will be longer than they 
 are in winter, and the weather will be warm- 
 
 'when spring is over, it will be summer. 
 Then the weather is hot, and the days are 
 
 •" ' 1 -nie and harvest. 
 
 long. 
 
 tiere wiii u\^ iiay 
 
•I 
 
 78 
 
 PROMISCUOUS 
 
 Ml 
 
 and thunder, and lightning. The fruit 
 will be ripe ; cherries, currants, peaches, and 
 plums and a great many other kinds of 
 fruit; and there will be moss roses that 
 smell so sweet, and fine pinks. 
 
 When summer is over, the days will be- 
 come short; there will be few flowers left 
 in the fields, and in the gardens ; the leaves 
 on the trees will begin to fade, and they 
 will fall ofl: The weather will be cold, and 
 there will be thick fogs. But it will not 
 be winter as soon as summer is over. No; 
 it will de autumn. Then apples and 
 pears, filberts and walnuts will be ripe. 
 
 When autumn is over, winter, cold win- 
 ter, will come again; and frost, ice, and 
 snow, and short dark days and long nights. 
 
 Spring, summer, autumn, winter. And 
 what are these called? 
 
 They are called the seasons. 
 
 Section 8. 
 
 The Lamb. 
 
 It is very cold. And how high the wind 
 
 Wha 
 
 It is 
 
 Poo 
 
 mothei 
 
 could ] 
 
 dead. 
 
 Pra 
 
 little 1 
 
 drink, 
 
 take c 
 
 sant, 
 
 fields, 
 
 W( 
 
 sky 1( 
 
 be a 
 
READING LKSSON«. 
 
 79 
 
 3 fruit 
 es, and 
 nds of 
 js that 
 
 vill be- 
 irs left 
 5 leaves 
 d they 
 Id J and 
 rill not 
 . No; 
 IS and 
 pe. 
 
 Id win- 
 
 le, and 
 
 nights. 
 
 And 
 
 be wind 
 
 What has that man in his arms? 
 It is a young lamb. ' 
 
 Poor thing! how it bleats! It wants its 
 mother. It is crying for her. I wish she 
 could hear it : but she cannot hear; she is 
 
 dead. ^ ,, t* o . 
 
 Pray, shepherd, take good care ot -.ne 
 little lamb, and give it nice new milk to 
 drink, and keep it warm; and when it can 
 take care of itself, and the weather is plea- 
 sant, let it sport aad frisk about m the 
 fields, and be very merry. 
 
 We must not go any further now. ine 
 sky looks very black. I think there will 
 be a heavy shower soon. 
 
 Section 9. 
 
 Sheep shearing. 
 
 Wriat is that man doing to the sheep? 
 
 He is cutting off their soft thick wool. 
 He is shearing them. The large scissors 
 that he has in his hand, are called shears. 
 It does not hurt the sheep to have their 
 wool cut off. They can do without it now 
 flin virtiofVipT js SO warm. 
 
80 
 
 PROMISCUOUS 
 
 And will the wool be thrown away? 
 
 No; it will not be thrown away. Char- 
 les's coat is made of wool. Blankets are 
 made of wool; and so are carpets, and flan- 
 nel, and a great many things. But the 
 wool must be carded first, and spun, and 
 woven, and died. 
 
 There is a woman spinning. She has a 
 very large wheel. That is wool which 
 she has in her hand . She is spinning for 
 her husband, and her children. 
 
 That little girl is carding the wool. 
 She is making it ready for her mother to 
 spin. 
 
 Section 10. 
 
 Boys looking for Bird's nests. 
 
 What are those boys looking for, in the 
 hedges, and among the bushes? 
 
 Little boys, what do you want? 
 
 We are looking for bird's nests. We 
 want some eggs, and some young birds. 
 
 But why should you take the eggs, and 
 thf^ vmiiiir birds? Thev will do VOU no 
 
 ^' v^'?l/*.l^:. 
 
BEADING LESSONS. 
 
 81 
 
 good; and the old birds who have taken 
 so much pains to build their nests, will be 
 very sorry indeed, to loose their eggs, and 
 their young ones. You cannot feed the 
 young birds so well as they can ; nor take 
 so good care of them; nor keep them 
 warm at nights. 
 
 Some little boys who steal young birds 
 from their soft, warm nests, and from the 
 parent birds, soon get tired of them, and 
 forget to feed them; then the little birds 
 die. The old birds are never tired ot 
 their young ones; and never leave off feed-^ 
 ing them, till they can fly, and take care ot 
 
 themselves. , . i /. v 
 
 A little boy took a young bird trom its 
 nest ; but very soon he was tired of it, and 
 did not like the trouble of feeding it, and 
 wanted to get rid of it. He asked some 
 little boys whom he met, if they would 
 have it; but they said they did not want it. 
 They told him to carry it, back to the nest 
 whence he had .taken it; but he would 
 not; he threw the bird into the water, and 
 drowned it. what a cruel boy ! 
 
 n 
 
82 
 
 READING LESSONS. 
 
 1 
 
 Little boys, if you find any nests, do not 
 rob the poor birds of their eggs, and their 
 young ones. You may look at the little 
 birds, in their nests : but do not frighten 
 them ; do not hurt them ; do not take them 
 away from their kind parents, and from 
 their soft, clean, warm nests. You would 
 not like, (would you?) that any body should 
 take you from your fathers and mothers, 
 and your homes; and keep you always 
 shut up, quite alone, in a very small place, 
 and feed you in a very strange way, or 
 almost starve you to death. 
 
83 
 
 CHAPTER 5.*. 
 
 Words of three syllables. 
 
 Section 1. 
 
 The accent on the first syllable. 
 
 All the syllables short. f 
 
 Al pha bet 
 a va rice 
 bash ful ness 
 blun der er 
 ca bi net 
 can die stick 
 ca nis ter 
 car pen ter 
 
 ca ta logue 
 cha rac ter 
 cin na men 
 cot ta ges 
 cov et ous 
 dif fer ence 
 em pe ror 
 ex eel lent 
 
 » Tlie arrangement in the words in this chapter, besides 
 aiding, in some degree, the pronunciation, will render the 
 learner's progress much easier than those arrangements, 
 which require frequent and perplexing transitions from a 
 word composed of short syllables, to another of long ones, 
 
 and vice versa, .. 
 
 \ To prevent embarrassment from too many sub-di- 
 visions, the middle sounds, in this chapter, are in- 
 cluded under the short; and the broad sounds, under the 
 
 n _^^ - - 
 
84 
 
 WORDS OF 
 
 All the syllables short. 
 
 Fa ther less 
 fish er man 
 fri vo lous 
 gar den er 
 ga ther ing 
 ge ne rous 
 gen tie man 
 gin ger bread 
 go vern ess 
 go vern or 
 grand fa ther 
 grand mo ther 
 grass hop per 
 hand ker chief 
 hus band man 
 ca len dar 
 jes sa mine 
 la ven der 
 le ve ret 
 li be ral 
 mid sum mer 
 mil li ner 
 mi nis tCi 
 
 nee ta rme 
 nut crack ers 
 ran ges 
 pil fer er 
 pri son er 
 pros per ous 
 pu nish ment 
 quar rel some 
 quick sil ver 
 ra ven ous 
 rot ten ness 
 se ve ral 
 se pa rate 
 shut tie cock 
 sil ver smith 
 spec ta cles 
 ten der ness 
 tra vel ler 
 trou ble some 
 va ga bond 
 web foot ed 
 wick ed ness 
 
 tiirnTi Ai^V Till 
 
THREE SYLLABLES. 
 
 85 
 
 AU the syllables long, 
 
 Cru ci fy 
 de vi ate 
 ea si ly 
 la dy fly 
 
 po e try 
 rose ma ry 
 se ere cy 
 sla ve ry 
 
 The two first short, the last long. 
 
 Af ter ward 
 but ter fly 
 CO lum bine 
 com pa ny 
 con tra ry 
 e ve ry 
 e ver green 
 ex er cise 
 flat te ry 
 gal le ry 
 goose ber ry 
 his to ry 
 ho nes ty 
 in dus try 
 in fan cy 
 man ful ly 
 
 me mo ry 
 mo de rate 
 mo dest ly 
 mul ber ry 
 nur se ry 
 par a dise 
 po ver ty 
 pre sent ly 
 pro per ly 
 rasp ber ry 
 sa tis fy 
 slip pe ry 
 some bo dy 
 vie to ry 
 wil ling ly 
 yes ter day 
 
 H2 
 
S6 
 
 WORDS OK 
 
 The two first long, the last short. 
 
 hay ma ker 
 la zi ness 
 moun te bank , 
 
 A pri cot 
 beau ti ful 
 du ti ful 
 coun te nance 
 cu ri ous 
 glo ri ous 
 gree di ness 
 
 The first short, the others long 
 
 sau ci ness 
 shoe ma ker 
 vi o let 
 vi lent 
 
 Ap pe tite 
 ar ti choke 
 ca li CO 
 ca the chise 
 di mi ty 
 e ne my 
 fur ni ture 
 
 bar mo ny 
 in di go 
 mer ri ly 
 ob sti nate 
 pet ti coat 
 pret ti ly 
 sig ni fy 
 
 The first long, the others short. 
 
 Al ma nac fool ish ness 
 
 cow ard ice by a cinth 
 
 dan ger ous i die ness 
 
 di a per la hour er 
 
 di a logue pow er ful 
 
 di a raond or na ment 
 
 *» vpn ine"* Gui et nCSS 
 
 Tie T ti.- « -'- '- ' - ^ ^ 
 
♦three syllables. 
 
 8t 
 
 The middle Bhort, and tfte others long. 
 
 Al rea dy 
 care fill ly 
 cham ber maid 
 de cen cy 
 faith ful ly 
 gor man dize 
 grate ful ly 
 i vo ry 
 mourn ful ly 
 
 night in gale 
 no bo dy 
 peace a bly 
 peace ful ly 
 play fel low 
 pri vate ly 
 straw ber ry 
 ta ble cloth 
 wheel bar row 
 
 The middle long, the others short. 
 
 Ac ci dent 
 an i mal 
 ^r ro gant 
 brick lay er 
 clean li ness 
 con so nant 
 daf fo dil 
 di li gence - 
 dif fi cult 
 e le phant 
 gun pow der 
 hap pi ness 
 
 in do lent 
 ig no rant 
 in no cent 
 in so lent 
 me di cine 
 mer ci ful 
 mer ri ment 
 mis chiev ous 
 of fi cer 
 plen ti ful 
 pro vi dence 
 quad ru ped 
 
IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET {MT-3) 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 11.25 
 
 ^IB 
 
 2.5 
 
 iiiiii 
 
 ^ m 
 
 ^ 1^ 12.0 
 
 1.8 
 
 U III! 1.6 
 
 V] 
 
 %^ '^ 
 
 A 
 
 a 
 
 I >f? 
 
 ^> :,^ 
 
 /A 
 
 ^ ^^ ^ *^ f / 
 
 <? 
 
 / 
 
 Photograpte 
 
 Sciences 
 Corporation 
 
 
 ^ 
 
 ^ 
 
 4^ ' 
 
 .\\ 
 
 
 '<^>. 
 
 23 WEST MAW 5T5EET 
 
 WEBSTIR.N.Y. 145B0 
 
 (716) 872-4503 
 

 
 
88 
 
 WORDS OK 
 
 Reading lesson, 
 adapted to the preceding section. 
 
 White and black mulberries. 
 
 A fine large apricot. 
 
 Yellow jessamine. 
 
 Pink, and blue, and white hyacinths. 
 
 How sweet the violets smell ! 
 
 A silk handkerchief. 
 
 A damask or diaper tablecloth. 
 
 Muslin, calico, and dimity, are made of 
 cotton. 
 
 Cotton grows in a pod, on a small tree, in 
 warm countries. 
 
 A quadruped is an animal with four feet. 
 
 Cows, and sheep, and horses, are quad- 
 rupeds. 
 
 An elephant is the largest of quadrupeds. 
 
 Ivory is the tusk, or teeth, of ele- 
 phants. 
 
 A leveret is a young hare. 
 
 Nobody that is able to work, should be 
 idle. 
 
 Learn something useful every day. 
 
 Beautiful animals are not the most use- 
 ful. 
 
THREE SYLLABLES. 
 
 89 
 
 Section 2. 
 Tbe accent on the second syllable. 
 
 All the syllables short 
 
 A bun dance 
 ad van tage 
 a mfend ment 
 a no tlier 
 ap pren tice 
 at ten tive 
 com inand ment 
 con si der 
 con tent ment 
 d:s trust ful 
 en dea vour 
 
 in debt ed 
 in dul gence 
 in struct er 
 mis con duct 
 neg lect ful 
 of fen sive 
 sub mis sive 
 um brel la 
 un plea sant 
 when e ver 
 what e ver 
 
 All the syllables long. 
 
 de mure ly 
 hu mane ly 
 po lite ly 
 
 po ta to 
 se rene ly 
 se vere ly 
 
 The two first ehort, the last long. 
 
 Ad ven ture dis tinct ly 
 
 con tem plate 
 con ti nue 
 dis fi gure . 
 
 dis tri bute 
 ex act ly 
 pn clean ly 
 
90 
 
 WORDS OF 
 
 The two first long, the last short. 
 
 Be tray er 
 ere a tor 
 de ceit ful 
 
 de CO rum 
 de light ful 
 de lu sive 
 de mure ness 
 de ni al 
 
 de stroy er 
 de vour er 
 di vi ded 
 bli ging 
 re deem er 
 re main der 
 re ward er 
 se du cer 
 
 The first short, the others long. 
 
 Bal CO ny ' sin cere ly 
 com plete ly un ea sy 
 
 im pure ly un seem ly 
 
 in qui ry un ti dy 
 
 The first long, the others short. 
 
 Be gin ning 
 be long jng 
 de can ter 
 de pend ent 
 for got ten 
 re luc tant 
 re mem ber 
 re miss ness 
 
 re sem ble 
 e le ven 
 e pis tie 
 me cha nic 
 re sis tance 
 -re venge ful 
 to geth er 
 wher e ver 
 
THREE SYLLABLES. 
 
 91 
 
 The middle long, the others short. 
 
 A bu sive 
 ac quaint ance 
 a gree ment 
 a muse ment 
 as su ranee 
 con tri vance 
 dis ci pie 
 dis dain ful 
 dis grace ful 
 
 era broi der 
 em ploy ment 
 en light en 
 en tice ment 
 for sa ken 
 in de cent 
 in hu man 
 un a ble 
 un grate ful 
 
 Eeading lesson. 
 
 When you read or speak, pronounce 
 every word distinctly. 
 
 Endeavour to improve and try to remem- 
 ber what you have learned. 
 
 Be kind and obliging to every body. 
 
 Let all your amusements be innocent. 
 
 Kemember a kindness, and never be un- 
 grateful. 
 
 A revengeful temper shows a bad heart, 
 m^ is very troublesome to him that has it. 
 
1'" i ■* 
 
 
 I t. 
 
 *', 
 
 ,y 
 
 V,'''i 
 
 ml i 
 
 92 ^ ^ WORDS OP 
 
 Section 3. 
 The accent on the last syllable. 
 
 All the syllables short. 
 
 con tra diet in ter mix 
 
 dis con tent re com mend 
 
 in cor rect un der stand 
 
 The two first short, the last long. 
 
 Dis a gree in ter cede 
 
 dis ap point ma ga zine 
 
 dis en gage un der take 
 
 en ter tain vo lun teer 
 
 The first short, the others long. 
 
 Dis o bey mis be have 
 
 dis blige re fu gee 
 
 dis u nite un be lief 
 
 The middle short, the others long, 
 
 ver hear o ver bear 
 
 o ver take su per scribe 
 
 o ver flow su per fine 
 
 The middle long, the others short. 
 
 Com plai sance cor re spond 
 
 com pre hend re pre sent 
 
 con de scend re pri raan4 
 
THREE SYLLABLES 
 
 n 
 
 Heading leBSon, 
 ' iadapted to tlM preeeding seotioD. 
 
 Never disagree with your play fellows. 
 If you disoblige others, they will disoblige 
 
 you. 
 
 Some children are apt to contradict, but 
 every body divslikes such a temper. 
 
 When you do not understand a thing and 
 modestly inquire, your friends will conde- 
 scend to instruct you. 
 
 To superscribe signifies, to write on the 
 top or outside. Charles will superscribe or 
 direct his letter. 
 
 To reprimand signifies to reprove a ^per- 
 son for some fault. James has received a 
 reprimand for neglecting his lesson. 
 
 Never try to overhear persons who are 
 speaking privately. 
 
 If any thing disappoints you, try to be 
 
 content. 
 
 People who can read well, and who love 
 to read, can entertain themselves with 
 books. 
 
m 
 
 94 
 
 CHAPTER 6. 
 
 Promiscuous Reading Lessons', 
 Section 1. 
 
 The Sun. 
 
 ^ - ' ■ ■ ' • . ■ 
 
 The sun rises in the east ; and when he 
 
 rises j it is day. 
 
 He shines upon the trees and the houses 
 and upon the water; and every thing looks 
 sparkling and beautiful, when he shines 
 upon it. He gives us light and heat ; it is 
 he that makes it warm. He makes the 
 fruit ripen, and the corn ripen. If he did 
 not shine upon the fields, and upon the 
 gardens, nothing would grow. 
 
 Sometimes he takes off his crown of 
 bright rays, and wraps up his head in thin 
 silver clouds, and then we may look at 
 him ; but when there are no clouds, and he 
 shines with all his brightness at noonday, 
 we cannot look at him, for he would dazzle 
 OMV cyesj, and make us blind. Only the 
 
/ 
 
 READING LESSONS. 
 
 95 
 
 eagle can look at him then : the eagle with 
 his strong piercing eye can gaze upon him 
 
 always. . . 
 
 When the sun is going to rise m the 
 morning, and make it day, the lark flies up 
 in the sky to meet him, and sings sweetly 
 in the air; and the cock crows bud to tell 
 every body that he is coming : but the owl 
 and the bat fly away when they see him, 
 and hide themselves in old walls and hol- 
 low trees : and the lion and the tiger go into 
 their den's and caves, where they sleep all 
 
 the day. 
 
 He shines in all countries, all over the 
 earth. He is the most beautiful and glorious 
 creature that can be seen in the whole 
 world. 
 
 Section 2. 
 
 The Moon. 
 
 The moon shines to give us light in 
 the night, when the sun is set. She is 
 very beautiful, and white like silver. We 
 may look at her always, for she is not so 
 bright as to dazzle our eyes, and she never 
 scorches us. She is mild and gentle. She 
 
96 
 
 PROMISCUOUS 
 
 i'. h 
 
 
 lets even the little glow-worms shine, which 
 are quite dark by day. The stars shine all 
 round her, but she seems larger and brighter 
 than the stars, and looks like a large 
 pearl amongst a great many small sparkling 
 diamonds. 
 
 When you are asleep, she shines through 
 your curtains with her gentle beams, and 
 seems to say. Sleep on, poor little tired boys, 
 I will not disturb you. The nightingale sings 
 to her, and sings better than all the birds of 
 the air. She sits upon a thorn, and sings 
 sweetly all the night long, while the dew 
 lies upon the grass, and every thing around 
 is still and silent. 
 
 Section 3. 
 
 The Swan. 
 
 AH birds that swim in the water are web- 
 footed. Their toes are joined together by a 
 skin that grows between them, that is being 
 web-footed; and it helps the birds to swim 
 well, for then their feet are like the fins of a 
 fish. 
 
 The swan is a large bird, larger than a 
 
READING LESSONS. 
 
 V7 
 
 goose. Its bill is red, but the sides of it 
 are black ; and it has black about its eyes. 
 Its legs are dusky, but its feet are red, and 
 it is webfooted. Its body is all white, as 
 white as snow, and very beautiful. It has 
 a very long neck. It lives in rivers and 
 lakes ; -and eats plants that grow in the wa- 
 ter, and seeds, and little insects, and snails. 
 It does not look pretty when it walks 
 upon the ground, for it cannot walk well; 
 but when it is in the water swimming 
 smoothly along, arching its long neck, and 
 dipping its white breast, with which it makes 
 way through the water, it is the most graceful 
 
 of all birds. 
 
 The swan builds her nest amongst the 
 reeds and rushes. The nest is made of 
 sticks and long grass ; and it is very large 
 and high. The eggs which she lays, are white, 
 and very large, larger a great deal, than a 
 goose's egg ; and she sits upon them for two 
 months: then they are hatched, and the 
 young ones come out. They are called 
 cygnets. They are not white at first, but 
 
 grayish. 
 
 If any body were to come near the swan, 
 
 :n 
 
>.1 
 
 ' ) 
 
 98 
 
 PROMISCUOUS 
 
 i'? 
 
 when she is in the nest, sitting upon her 
 eggs, or when she has young ones, she 
 would fly at him ; for she is very fierce to 
 defend her young : and if he were to come 
 to take them away, she would beat him 
 own with her strong wings, and perhaps 
 break his arm. The swan lives a very great 
 while. 
 
 Section 4. 
 
 The Hare. 
 
 Ha! what is there amongst the furze? I 
 can see only its eyes. It has very large 
 full eyes. It is a hare. It is in its 
 form, or house, squatting down amongst 
 the bushes to hide itself, for it is very 
 fearful. 
 
 The hare is very innocent and gentle. 
 Its colour is brown ; but in countries which 
 are very cold, it turns white as snow. It 
 has a short bushy tail : its lip is parted, and 
 very hairy; and it always moves its lips. 
 Its hind legs are very long, that it may run 
 the better. The hare feeds upon herbs, and 
 roots, and the bark of young trees, and 
 green corn; and sometimes it will creep 
 thrppgh the hedge, and steal intothegardens, 
 
READING LESSONS. 
 
 99 
 
 in her 
 , she 
 •ce to 
 come 
 t him 
 irhaps 
 great 
 
 ze? I 
 
 large 
 n its 
 
 ongst 
 very 
 
 en tie* 
 ivhich 
 \ It 
 [, and 
 1 lips, 
 y run 
 ?^ and 
 and 
 creep 
 dens, 
 
 to eat pinks and a little parsley ; and it loves 
 to play and skip about by moonlight, and 
 to bite the tender blades of grass, when the 
 dew is upon them; but in the daytime it 
 sleeps in its form. 
 
 She sleeps with her eyes open, because 
 she is very fearful and timid; and when 
 ^;he hears the least noise, she starts, and 
 pricks up her large ears. And when the 
 huntsman sounds his horn, and the poor 
 harmless hare hears the dogs coming, she 
 runs away very swiftly straight forward, 
 stretching her legs, and leaves them all be- 
 hind. But the dogs pursue her, and she 
 grows tired, and cannot run so fast as at first. 
 Then she doubles, and turns, and runs 
 back to her form, that the hounds may not 
 find her; but they run with their noses to 
 the ground, smelling till they have found 
 her out. So when she has run five or six 
 miles, at last she stops, and pants for 
 breath, and can run no futrher Then the 
 hounds come up, and tear her, and kill 
 her. 
 
 When she is dead, her little limbs which 
 moved so fast^ grow quite stiff, and cannot 
 
100 
 
 PRGMTSrUOUS 
 
 move at all Her poor little heart, that 
 beat so quick, is quite stiff and cold; and 
 her round full eyes are dull and dim; 
 and her soft furry skin is all torn and 
 
 bloody. 
 
 Section 5. 
 
 The good Boy. 
 
 The good boy loves his parents very 
 dearly. He always minds what they say 
 to him and tries to please them. If they 
 desire him not *x do a thing, he does it not : 
 if they desire him to do a thing, he does 
 it. When they deny him what he wants, 
 he does not grumble, or pout out his lips, 
 or look angry : but he thinks that his pa- 
 rents know what is proper for him, better 
 than he does, because they are wiser than he 
 
 is. 
 
 He loves his teachers, and all who tell 
 him what is good. He likes to read and to 
 write, and to learn something fresh every 
 day. He hopes that if he lives to be a man. 
 he' shall know a great many things and be 
 very wise and good 
 
 He is kind to his brothers and sisters, 
 and all his little playfellows. He never 
 
that 
 ; and 
 
 dim; 
 1 and 
 
 very 
 y say 
 
 they 
 t not: 
 3 does 
 vants, 
 s lips, 
 is pa- 
 better 
 tianhe 
 
 10 tell 
 and to 
 every 
 siman. 
 md be 
 
 iliiters, 
 
 never 
 
 READING LESSORS. 
 
 101 
 
 fights, nor quarrels with them, nor calls 
 them names. When he sees them do 
 wrong, he is sorry, and tries to persuade 
 them to do better. 
 
 He does not speak rudely to any body. 
 If he sees any persons who are lame, or 
 crooked, or very old, he does not laugh at 
 them, nor mock them ; but he is glad when 
 he can do them any service. ^ 
 
 He is kind even to dumb creatures : for 
 he knows that though they cannot speak, 
 they can feel as well as we. Even those 
 animals which he does not think pretty, he ' 
 takes care not to hurt. He likes very much 
 to see the birds pick up bits of hay, and 
 moss, and wool, to build their nests v/ith; 
 and he likes to see the hen sitting on her 
 nest, or feeding her young ones; and to 
 see the little birds in their nests, and hear 
 them chirp. Sometimes he looks about in 
 the bushes, and in the trees, and among the 
 strawberry plants, to find nests: but when 
 he has found them, he only just peeps at 
 them; he would rather not see the little 
 birds, than frirfiteu them, or do them any 
 
 *& 
 
 larra. 
 
102 
 
 READING LESSONS. 
 
 I 
 I 
 i 
 
 I 
 
 
 He never takes any thing that does not 
 belong to hira, or meddle with it without 
 leave. When he walks in his father's gar- 
 den, he does not pull flowers, or gather 
 fruit, unless he is told that he may 
 do so. The apples that are fallen on 
 the ground, he picks up, and carries to his 
 mother. 
 
 He never tells a lie. If he has done 
 any mischief, he confesses it, and says 
 he is very sorry, and will try to do so 
 no more; and nobody can be angry with 
 
 him. 
 
 When he lies down at night, he tries 
 to remember all he has been doing, and 
 learning' in the day. If he has done wrong, 
 he is sorry, and hopes he shall do so no 
 more : and that God who is so good, will love 
 and bless him. — He loves to pray to God, 
 and to hear and read about him; and to 
 go with his parents and friends to worship 
 God. 
 
 Every body that knows this good boy, 
 loves him and speaks well of him, and is 
 kind to him, and he is very happy. 
 
oes not 
 vithout 
 r's gar- 
 gather 
 e may 
 en on 
 I to his 
 
 LS done 
 d says 
 o do so 
 y with 
 
 le tries 
 g, and 
 wrong, 
 3 so no 
 vill love 
 to God, 
 and to 
 worship 
 
 od boy, 
 and is 
 
 PART III. 
 
 Words less familiar to children— Correspon- 
 dent Heading lessons — ^Miscellaneous ar- 
 ticles—Rules for spelling, and pronuncia- 
 tion. 
 
 When the learner has been carefully taught the 
 lessons, contained in the first and second parts of 
 the book, and been confirmed in the general prin- 
 ciples of pronunciation, it will be less necessary 
 (even if it were praticable) to pursue the preceding 
 mode of arrangement, to enable him to pronounce 
 the words in the remaining part of the work. Some 
 aid he will occasionally receive : but in general he 
 will now derive more advantage from the exercise 
 of his memory and judgment. The words of the 
 first chapter are, however such as children frequerft- 
 ly hear; and the arrangement is calculated to pre- 
 vent discordant and difficult transitions. 
 
 In arranging the words into syllables, the author 
 has not considered the letters, or terminations, tions, 
 tious, scious, science, &c. as distinct syllables. 
 By dividing these terminations, the gradations in 
 spelling a word that contains them, are easy to the 
 learner; and the perplexity of many different and 
 irremiljir combinations, is avoided. — See the nine- 
 teeth chapter, on the division of syllables. 
 
104 
 
 TRISYLLABLES. 
 
 K. 
 
 CHAPTER 1. 
 
 Words of three and more syllables. 
 
 Section 1. 
 
 4- 
 
 Words ending in tion, <fec. pronounced as two syllables, with 
 the accent on the first syllable. 
 
 1. The accented syllable short;* ^ 
 
 Ac ti on 
 cap ti ous 
 con sci ence 
 con sci ous 
 fac ti ous 
 fac ti on ' 
 frac ti on 
 June ti on 
 lus ci ous 
 man si on 
 
 mar ti al 
 men ti on 
 mil li on 
 mi ni on 
 mis si on 
 nup ti ,al 
 op ti on 
 par ti al 
 pas si on 
 pen si on 
 
 
 * By arranging the words according to the quantity of the 
 accented syllable, pronunciation is aided ; the transition from 
 word to word is easy ; and the iuconvenieuce of the double 
 accent is avoided, 
 
 Tion, &c. in this section, are pronounced thus, 
 Tion and sion like ihutii 
 
THISYLltAliLAS. 
 
 103 
 
 •tw^' 
 
 es. 
 
 bles, with 
 
 pil li on 
 pi ni on 
 pre ci ous 
 sec ti oil 
 ses si on 
 
 spe ci al 
 sue ti on 
 unc ti on 
 ver si oii 
 vi ci ous 
 
 2. The accented syllable long. 
 
 an ci ent 
 auc ti on 
 hm si er 
 cau ti 6ti 
 cau ti ous 
 gla zi er 
 gra ci ous 
 ho si er 
 mo ti on^ 
 na ti on 
 
 no ti oti 
 pa ti eiice 
 pat ti ent 
 por ti on 
 p6 ti oti 
 quo ti elit 
 so ci al 
 spa ci ous 
 spe ci ousi 
 sta ti on 
 
 itity of the 
 sition from 
 the double 
 
 lUS, 
 
 TiouB, Biiom, and eious like M«t 
 
 Seienoe and tience «.,... .like ihenc« 
 
 T:oi an/1 niol like thai 
 
 Zier and sier like aAiir 
 
 Ion, {»reo«d^d by I orn. • . ; . .y.like ywi 
 
 K 
 
10»j 
 
 III 
 
 \ 
 
 m 
 
 T|tlSYl4LAB|.E8. 
 
 gfiCTION 2. 
 
 Words of three syllables. 
 The accent on the first syllable. 
 
 1. The accented syllable short 
 
 jus ti fy 
 lux u ry 
 
 ac cu rate 
 af fa ble 
 be ne fit 
 cha ri ty 
 com pa ny 
 CU8 torn er;q 
 e vi dent 
 her mit age 
 im pUfdentp 
 
 mas cu line 
 no vel ty 
 ob sta cle 
 per se cute 
 pos ^i ble 
 spec ta cle 
 tes ta ment 
 
 ..,, 2.: Tlw.wjoented syllable long. 
 
 all en i q^ to li ness 
 
 CO gen cfuU 
 di a dem 
 dra pe ry 
 du ra ble 
 fe ver ish • 
 fu ne ral 
 glo.ri iy 
 
 kna vish ly n 
 
 lu na tic 
 -mu ta ble 
 
 no ti fy 
 .*y^>j*i'pi ety ■ 
 re cent ly 
 
 va can cy 
 
 grace fui uess , . i » n. Jate 
 
TRISYLLABLES. 
 
 ^t07 
 
 The accent on the second syllable. 
 
 1. *rhe accented syllaole ehort. 
 
 ac com plish 
 af feet ing 
 at tend ance 
 con nee ted 
 con sump tive 
 de li ver 
 de mon strate 
 dis CO ver 
 dis ho nest 
 do mes tic 
 
 em bel lish 
 for get fill 
 im mo d^st 
 in ha bit 
 in ter pret 
 oc cur rence 
 of fend er 
 to bac CO 
 tri um phant 
 un com mon 
 
 2. The Bocented Bjllable long. 
 
 ad vi ser 
 ap pear ance 
 at tain ment 
 ca the dral 
 de ceiv er 
 de ci sive 
 de lu sive 
 dif fu sive 
 en vi rons 
 ex alt ed 
 
 he ro ic 
 ma tuf e ly 
 
 * per fu mer 
 per sua sive 
 po ma turn 
 re Vie^ er 
 se ctire ly 
 
 '^ spec ta tor 
 tri bu hal 
 un time ly 
 
11 
 
 I ? 
 
 M8 
 
 raJUYSVIil^A^LBS. 
 
 Section 3. 
 
 Words ending in tion, 4a pronounced as three syllable* with 
 the accent on the second syllable. 
 
 1, Th^ accented syllable short 
 
 Af fee ti on es sen ti al 
 
 I 
 
 III 
 
 at ten ti on 
 corn pa ni on 
 com pas si on 
 con di ti on 
 con fes si on 
 de li ci ous 
 de scrip ti on 
 e lec ti on 
 
 ex pres si on 
 in struc ti on 
 li cen ti ous 
 ob jec tion 
 per fee ti on 
 pro vin ci al 
 sub stan ti al 
 suf fi ci ent 
 
 2. The accented syllable long. 
 
 ca pa ci ous 
 con clu si on 
 con fu si on 
 ere a ti on 
 de yo ti on 
 fs^ la ci ous 
 foun da ti on 
 im ps^ ti ent 
 nar ra ti on 
 
 o ra ti on 
 pot lu ti on 
 pro por ti on 
 re la ti on 
 sal va ti on 
 temp ta ti on 
 trans la ti on 
 va ca li on 
 vex a ti on 
 
POLYBVXLABLfiSl 
 
 ih^ 
 
 .oiclnlfv-^ ^'SiECTioM'^.''^ ^iB^^oA 
 
 Words of 'foiit-Syllabliesl 
 
 i> Accent on the 
 
 ^HBi '''J. lie accented 
 
 ad ppi ra ble 
 
 .an;iiu,^ly. 
 c^ ter pil lar 
 
 cha ri ta ble 
 
 com for ta ble 
 
 •<ii U gent ly 
 
 ta ber dash er 
 
 ho nour a We 
 
 d 
 
 d 
 
 first i^yliasfole^ 
 
 syllable snort 
 
 in! t^. resting 
 toi s^ ra hie 
 
 o ; ne cessgkTy 
 
 obs ti na cy 
 
 , pro fij ta, ble^ 
 
 > ^ecrQ tarry> 
 
 tran si to ry 
 
 
 in ti ma, cy i;.ii^ Uim: ve ge^ta ble 
 
 ;^^rf i 2. Thd accented syllable long. - 
 
 mbtentfkty 
 mu it cail IjP 
 
 . a^f a We-^ 
 
 ^^yia^ry^-^^ 
 
 beau ti fully 
 CO pi. bus' ly^ 
 din ger ous ly 
 forjui da t)le 
 fraud ju IM ly 
 hu thouT^aus ly 
 luMiia'rjr^ 
 
 tfitne roui^ly 
 bt di ha tVf' 
 
 if^ibh aWe 
 e oils kess 
 
 sea son a bly 
 
 K2 
 
m 
 
 P0LYaYI4«ABLE8. 
 
 Accent on thq secpiid syllable, 
 t Tbe aooratodigrlH^fS'fthor^ 
 
 ab mx 4i ty in dm tri ou» 
 
 a- 
 
 ad ver si ty 
 bar ba ri ty 
 be ne va letit 
 ea pa ci ty 
 com mend a ble 
 eon si der ate 
 di mi nu tive 
 ex pe ri ment 
 ex tra, va gtot 
 
 ab ste mi ouft 
 a bu ^iye ly 
 a gree a tie 
 cm so ri ous 
 cpn ve ni ent 
 d^ plo ra ble 
 de si rable 
 e lu ci date 
 e nu me rate 
 erjrone ou^ 
 
 in ha bi tant 
 no bi li ty 
 par ticu lar 
 pp05 pe ri ty 
 ti di cu lous 
 isin ce ri ty 
 so H cit oxx^ 
 ty ran ni cal 
 u)i mannerly 
 
 ex eeed ing ly 
 ex en sa ble 
 gram ma ri an 
 in ea pa ble 
 in de cen cy 
 la bori ous 
 loaterial 
 o]b scu ri ty 
 . ' BU pa n oi^n 
 variety : 
 
POLYSYLLABLES. 
 
 nx 
 
 Accent on the third syllable. 
 
 1. The accented syllable short. 
 
 ac ci dent al in con sist ent 
 
 ap pre hen sive 
 be ne fac tor 
 com pli ment al 
 com pre hen sive 
 cor re spond ence 
 dis ad van tage 
 dis con tent ed 
 e pi de mic 
 in ad vert ence 
 
 in of fen sive 
 ma le fac tor 
 ma nu fac ture 
 me mo ran dum 
 or na men tal 
 pa ra ly tic 
 sci en ti fie 
 un be com ing 
 u ni ver sal 
 
 2. The accented syllable long. 
 
 af fi da vit 
 an no ta tor 
 an te ce dent 
 bar ri da do 
 bas ti na do 
 com ment a tor 
 dan dd li on 
 dis a gree ment 
 uis ap pioint eu 
 
 Eti ro pe an 
 hy me ne al 
 ig no ra mus 
 in CO he rent 
 in ter fe rence 
 iae di a tor 
 mo de ra tor 
 op? por txnm ly 
 
 • 1 
 
 s%j mi i;u i^m 
 
 did com po sure vir tu o so 
 
fw 
 
 113 
 
 .>; 
 
 POLYSYLLABLRS. 
 
 B^OTION 6, 
 
 Words ending in <ion, &o. pronounced as four syllables, with 
 the accent on the third syllable. 
 
 1. The accemted syllable short 
 
 a va ri ci ous 
 con de seen si on 
 con sci en ti ous 
 de fi ni ti on 
 dis qui si ti on 
 e qui noc ti al 
 ex pe di ti on 
 ex pe di ti ous 
 im per fee ti on 
 
 m au spi ci ous 
 in suf fi ci ent 
 op po si ti on 
 pe ni ten ti al 
 pre ju di ci al 
 pre pos ses si on 
 re qui si ti on 
 sa tis fac ti on 
 su per sti ti ous 
 
 2. The accented syllable long. 
 
 ab so lu ti on ef fi ca ci ous 
 
 ad mi ra ti on 
 ap pli ca ti on 
 ap pro ba ti on 
 com pi la ti on 
 cOn ver sa ti on 
 cul t! v^ ti on 
 de MOV, sti'a ti on 
 e du ca ti on 
 
 e mu la ti on 
 in eli na ti o; 
 in vi ta ti oil 
 ob ser va ti on 
 pre pa ra ti on 
 pro vo cJa ti on 
 re sig na ti on 
 re so lu ti on 
 
POLYSYLLABLES 
 
 113 
 
 lefl, with 
 
 lOUS 
 
 ent 
 on 
 ;i al 
 i al 
 s si on 
 L on 
 i on 
 ti ous 
 
 ous 
 on 
 i o. 
 
 ti on 
 fci on 
 tl on 
 
 bi on 
 on 
 
 Section 6. 
 
 Words of five syllables. 
 
 The accent on the second syllable. 
 
 1. The accented eyllable short. 
 
 a bo mi na ble 
 a po the ca ry 
 con si de ra ble 
 con ti nu al ly 
 dis ho nour a ble 
 dis in te rest ed 
 ex pla na to ry 
 i ma gin a ry 
 im prac ti ca ble 
 
 in com pa fa, ble 
 in es ti ma ble 
 pre pa ra to ry 
 re po si to ry 
 un cha ri ta ble 
 un com fort a ble 
 un go vern a ble 
 un ne ces sa ry 
 un par don a ble 
 
 2. The accented syllable long. 
 
 cen so ri ous ly 
 com rau ni ca ble 
 , com mu ni ca tive 
 fe lo ni ous ly 
 im me di ate ly 
 in du bi ta ble 
 in vi o la ble 
 
 la UU ii UUO I J 
 
 ma te ri al ly 
 mys te rious ly 
 no to ri ous ly 
 obse quiousness 
 pe cu ni a ry 
 re me di a ble 
 re mu ne ra tive 
 
 i\n T»pa cf\n a nlA 
 
 lux u ri ant ly vie to ri ous ly 
 
tit A 
 
 \i :,w: 
 
 IH POLYSYLLABLES. 
 
 Accent oh the third syllable. 
 
 1. The accented syllable short. 
 
 a ca de mi cal 
 ial pha bet i cal 
 a ni mo si ty 
 an ni ver sa ry 
 chris ti an i tv 
 con tra die to ry 
 cu ri si ty 
 ge o gra phi cal 
 hos pi tal i ty 
 im mo ral i ty 
 
 in ci vil i ty 
 in dis pen sa ble 
 in fi del i ty 
 in sig ni fi cant 
 ° ir re sist i ble 
 li be ral i ty 
 nia nu fac to ry 
 sa tis fac to ry 
 sen si bi li ty 
 u ni ver si ty 
 
 2. The accented syllable long. 
 
 am bi gu i ty 
 ce re mo ni ous 
 con tu me li ous 
 dis a gree a ble 
 dis be di ence 
 ex com mu ni cate 
 im ma te ri al 
 im me mo ri al 
 im pro pri e ty 
 
 m con so 
 
 la ble 
 
 in con ve ni ent 
 in de cli na ble 
 in ex cu sa ble 
 in ge nu i ty 
 in ter me di ate 
 jus ti fi a ble 
 me ri to ri ous 
 mis eel la ne ous 
 op por tu ni ty 
 un ac count a ble 
 
 
POLYSYLLABLES. 
 
 115 
 
 i ty 
 n sa ble 
 
 i ty 
 fi cant 
 i ble 
 
 ity 
 
 ic to ry 
 5 to ry 
 
 lity 
 
 si ty 
 
 e ni ent 
 L na ble 
 . sa ble 
 lity 
 e di ate 
 a ble 
 ri ous 
 la ne ous 
 u ni ty 
 unt a ble 
 
 Accent on the fourth syllable. 
 
 cha rac ter is tic ex pe ri ment al 
 
 ec cle si as tic 
 en thu si as tic 
 e pi gram ma tic 
 
 su per a bun dance 
 ad mi nis tra tor 
 mul ti pli ca tor 
 
 Accent on the first syllable. 
 
 cus torn a ri ly 
 de di ca to ry 
 fi gu ra tive ly 
 la bo ra to ry 
 
 ne ces sa ri ly 
 or di na ri ly 
 po ly syl la ble 
 vo lun ta ri ly 
 
 v^ 
 
 Section 7. 
 
 Words ending in Hon, &o. pronounced as five syllables with 
 the accent on the fourth syllable. 
 
 ab bre vi a ti on 
 ac com mo da ti on 
 al le vi a ti on 
 cir cum lo cu ti on 
 com mu ni ca ti ou 
 con si der a ti on 
 con ti nu a ti on 
 de li ber a ti on 
 
 e qui vo ca ti on 
 ex a mi na ti on 
 in ter pre ta ti on 
 in ter ro ga ti on 
 jus ti fi ca ti on 
 re com mend a ti on 
 sig ni fi ca ti on 
 sub or di na ti on 
 
 de ter mi na ti on ver si fi ca ti oo 
 
116 
 
 POLYSYLLABLES. 
 
 , '* 
 
 I'' Hi 
 
 ,,., 
 
 Section 8. 
 
 Words of six and seven syllables, properly accented. 
 
 in v6 lun ta ri ly dis sa tis fac to ry 
 un rea son a ble ness e ty mo 16 gi cal 
 ce re mo ni ous ly fa mi li ar i ty 
 
 dis o b6 di ent ly 
 em blem a ti cal ly 
 in con si der ate ly 
 in con v6 ni ent ly 
 in ter ro ga to ry 
 me ri to ri ous ly 
 re com m6nd a to ry 
 su per an nu a ted 
 su per nil mer a ry 
 
 im mu ta bi li ty 
 infalibjlity 
 pe cu li ar i ty 
 pre des ti na ri an 
 su per in t^nd en cy 
 u ni ver sal i ty 
 im ma te ri al i ty 
 in cor rup ti bi li ty 
 va le tu di na ri an 
 
 Section 9. 
 
 Reading lesson , 
 
 adapted to the sectiona of this chapter. 
 
 A kind action gives pleasure, both to 
 ourselves and to th6 person to whom we are 
 
 kind. 
 
 Violent passions make people miserable. 
 
 Charles was very ill, but he was patient. 
 His friends treated him with great attention 
 and compassion. 
 
POLYSYLLABLES. 
 
 117 
 
 ented. 
 
 > ry 
 al 
 
 ty 
 
 1 an 
 en cy 
 
 y 
 
 ity 
 
 i li ty 
 ri an 
 
 both to 
 I we are 
 
 serable. 
 patient, 
 ttention 
 
 If we would gain knowledge, we must 
 study very diligently. 
 
 A good education is a great blessing. 
 
 A caterpillar changes into a butterfly. 
 All the butterflies, which we see flying 
 about, were caterpillars once* ^^ 
 
 An apothecary sells medicines. 
 
 The haberdasher sells tape and thread, 
 and pins, and neebles, and other, small 
 wares. 
 
 To think to highly of purselves is unbe- 
 coming and ridiculous, ' ''* '.'[ 
 
 If we expect others to love us, without 
 our being kind and good, we shall be dis- 
 appointed, ) 
 
 To fret because others are , happier than 
 we are, is very unreasonable. 
 
 We should remember, that if we let an 
 opportunity of doing good, pass away, it 
 will never return. 
 
 To do a thing voluntarily, signifies to do 
 it willingly. 
 
 To be superannuated, is, to be unable to 
 do things, on account of old age, ^ ^ 
 
 A valetudinarian is one that is sickly. 
 
CHAPTER 2. 
 
 
 n 
 
 hi 
 
 Promiscuous reading lessons. 
 Section 1. 
 
 The Boy and the LookiDg-glasa. 
 
 A little boy, when his father and mother 
 ^ere froiw home, was playing at ball in a 
 fobm where there was a looking-glass.. 
 
 Before he began to play, he had turned 
 the back of the looking-glass towards him, 
 for fear he should break the glass. It 
 would have been better, if he had gone out 
 of doors to play at ball. As he was not a 
 careless boy, I wonder he was not afraid of 
 breaking the windows, as well as the look- 
 ing-glass, but I suppose he did not think of 
 
 that. 
 
 Whilst he was playing, and perhaps not 
 thinking at all about the looking-glass, his 
 ball struck the wooden back, and broke the 
 glass. When he saw the mischief he had 
 done, he was very sorry ; and, I believe, he 
 
 «^««:;i l^;o -PafViAv onrl rnnflipr would be 
 
 displeased with him. 
 
READING LESSONS. 
 
 119 
 
 aother 
 1 in a 
 I.. 
 
 ;urned 
 s him, 
 s. It 
 ne out 
 not a 
 raid of 
 3 look- 
 link of 
 
 ps not 
 ss, his 
 ke the 
 be had 
 eve, he 
 mid be 
 
 When his parents came home, he went 
 to his father, and said; "Father, I have 
 broken the best looking-glass in the house 
 and I am very sorry for it. " His father 
 looked kindly at him, and said, "I would 
 i-ather thsbt sill the looking-glasses in my 
 house ^hoifld be broken, than that one of 
 toy children should tell an untruth." 
 
 The little boy hearing his father say this, 
 and seeing that he was not angry, felt com- 
 forted ; though, I suppose, he wished very 
 much that he had not broken the looking- 
 glass. After that time, when he met with 
 an accident, he confessed it; and would not 
 on any account, tell an untruth. . 
 
 Section 2. 
 
 The good boy trhoae parents ar« rich. 
 
 The good boy whose parents are rich, has 
 fine clothes to wear; and he rides on a 
 pretty little horse, and in a coach; and has 
 servants to wait on him: but he does not, 
 lor an luac, iniuK inau ne is ueiLcr tuau 
 other boys whose parents are not rich. 
 
ii 
 
 120 
 
 PROMISCUOUS 
 
 i 
 
 !■•' 
 
 
 
 tils 
 
 In & 
 
 Wk • 
 
 He knows that all rich people are not good : 
 and that God gives a great deal of money 
 to some persons, in order that they may 
 assist those who are poor. 
 
 He speaks kindly to all his father's ser- 
 vants. He does not call them to wait upon 
 him, when they are at their meals, or very 
 busy. If he wants them to do him a ser- 
 vice, he asks them prettily, and thanks them 
 for what they do for him. He never gives 
 them any trouble that he can avoid, there- 
 fore, he is careful not to make dirt in the 
 house, and not to break any thing, or put 
 it out of its place, and not to tear his clothes. 
 When any of the servants who wait upon 
 him, are ill, he likes to go and see them ; and 
 he often thinks of them and asks how they 
 
 do. 
 
 He likes to go with his father or his mother 
 to see poor people, in their cottages ; and 
 he gives them almost all the money he 
 
 has. 
 
 When he sees little boys and girls, that 
 are ragged, dirty, and rude, and that have 
 nobody to teach them to read, and to give 
 
RBADINO LESSONS. 
 
 121 
 
 good: 
 noney 
 
 ' may 
 
 's ser- 
 lupon 
 : very 
 a ser- 
 ; them 
 ' gives 
 there- 
 in the 
 or put 
 iothes. 
 upon 
 i; and 
 V they 
 
 aother 
 ; and 
 ey he 
 
 s, that 
 ,t have 
 :o give 
 
 them good books, he is very sorry for them, 
 and he often $ays," If I were a man, and 
 had a great deal of money, I think no per- 
 son that lived near me should be very poor. 
 I would build a great many pretty cottages 
 for poor people to live in ; and every cot- 
 tage should have belonging to it a garden, 
 and a field, in order that the poor 
 people might have plenty of vegetables, 
 and a cow, and a pig, and some poultry; 
 and they should not pay me much rent. 
 I would give clothes to the little boys and 
 girls; and they should all learn to read, 
 and to write, and to work, and to be very 
 good.'* 
 
 Section 3. 
 
 The good boy whose parents are poor. 
 
 The good boy whose parents are poor, 
 rises very early in the morning; and all 
 day longi does as much as he can to help 
 his father and mother. 
 
 When he goes to school, he walks quick- 
 ly and does not lose time on the road. 
 '^ My parents," says he,** are good, to save 
 some of their money, in order that I may 
 
 L2 ' 
 
122 
 
 PROMISCUOUS 
 
 i' I 
 
 ;s,'i ' 
 
 I 111' 
 
 |;'qt ' 
 
 learn to read and write ; but they cannot 
 give much nor can they spare me long; 
 therefore I must learn as fast as I can : if 
 any body has time to lose, I am sure I have 
 not. I should be very sorry, when I am a man, 
 not to know how to read very well, in the 
 Bible, and other good books ; and when I 
 leave my parents, not to be able to read their 
 letters and to write them word where I am, 
 and how I do. And I must learn accounts, 
 for when I grow up, I shall have many things 
 to reckon about my work, and what I buy : I 
 shall perhaps have bills to make out, as my 
 father has; and perhaps I shall be employed 
 
 in a shop." 
 
 When he has finished his lessons, he does 
 not stay to play, but runs home ; he wants 
 to see his father and mother, and to help 
 them, and to nurse the little baby. He often 
 sees naughty boys in the streets, and in the 
 fields, fight and steal, and do many sad 
 things : and he hears them swear and call 
 names, and tell lies : but he does not like to 
 K^ xtT\fh tH^»p ^f^T^ ^f^^^ <^^hev should make 
 him as bad as they are ; and that any body 
 
KEADINQ LESSONS. 
 
 123 
 
 jannot 
 long; 
 m: if 
 [have 
 a man, 
 in the 
 hen I 
 i their 
 1 1 am, 
 lounts, 
 things 
 buy : I 
 as my 
 ployed 
 
 le does 
 wants 
 :o help 
 e often 
 L in the 
 ly sad 
 nd call 
 like to 
 [ make 
 y body 
 
 who sees him with them, should think that 
 he, too, is naughty. 
 
 When he is at home, he is very mdustn- 
 ous . He takes care of the little children ; 
 mehds his clothes, knits his stockings, and 
 spins worsted; or he weeds his father's 
 garden, and hoes, and rakes it, and sows 
 seeds in it. Sometimes he goes with his 
 father to work, then he is very glad, and 
 though he is but a little fellow, he works 
 very hard, almost like a man. When he 
 comes home to dinner, he says, "How hun- 
 gry I am ! and how good this bread is, and 
 this bacon! Indeed, I think every thing 
 we have is good. I am glad I can work : I 
 hope that 1 shall soon be able to earn all 
 my clothes, and my food too.'* 
 
 When he sees little boys and girls riding 
 on pretty horses, or in coaches, or walking 
 with ladies and gentlemen, and having on 
 very fine clothes, he does not envy them, 
 nor wish to be like them. He says,"! 
 have often been told, and I have read, that 
 it is God who makes some to be poor, and 
 some rich; that the rich have many trou- 
 bles which'^e know nothing of: aj>d that 
 

 
 ";!■: 
 
 mi 
 
 mMm 
 
 m 
 
 ll*' ' 
 
 Mi 
 
 m 
 
 124 
 
 PftOM|8CtJOU6 
 
 the pool*, if they are but good, may be 
 very happy : indeed, I think that when I 
 am good, nobody can be happier than I 
 am.'^ 
 
 Section 4. 
 
 The attentive and industrious little girl. 
 
 She always minds what her father and 
 mother says to her, and takes pains to learn 
 whatever they are so kind as to teach her . 
 She is never noisy or troublesome : so they 
 like to have her with them, and they like to 
 talk to her, and to instruct her. 
 
 She has learned to read so well, and she is 
 so good a girl, that her fether has given her 
 several little books, which she reads in by 
 herself, whenever she likes : and she under- 
 stands all that is in them. 
 
 She knows the meaning of a great many 
 diflScult words, and the names of a great 
 many countries, cities, and towns, and she 
 can find them upon a map. She can spell 
 almost every little sentence that her father 
 asks her to spell; and she can write very 
 prettily, even without a copy; and she can 
 do a great many sums on a slate-. 
 
READING LESSONS. 
 
 125 
 
 ay be 
 hen I 
 ban I 
 
 jr and 
 ) learn 
 b her. 
 
 they 
 like to 
 
 [ she is 
 
 en her 
 
 in by 
 
 under-f 
 
 many 
 
 1 great 
 nd she 
 n spell 
 father 
 3 very 
 be can 
 
 Whatever she does, she takes pains to do 
 it well ; and when she is doing one thing, 
 she tries not to think of another. 
 
 If she has made a mistake, or done any 
 . thing wrong, she is sorry for it : and when 
 she is told of k fault, she endeavours to 
 avoid it another time. 
 
 When she wants to know any thing, she 
 asks her father, or her mother to tell her; 
 and she tries to understand, and to remem- 
 ber what they tell her : but if they do not 
 think proper to answer her questions, she 
 does not tease them, but says, "When I am 
 older, they will perhaps instruct me;" and 
 she thinks about something else. 
 
 She likes to sit by her mother, and sew 
 of knit. When she sews, she does not 
 take long stitches, or pucker her work; but 
 does it very neatly, just as her mother tells 
 her to do. And she always keeps her 
 work very clean: for if her hands are dirty 
 she washes them before she begins her work ; 
 and when she has finished it, she folds it up, 
 and puts it by, very carefully, in her work- 
 bae:. or in a drawer. It is but very seldom, 
 indeed, that she loses her thread, or needles, 
 

 
 1 *i 
 
 m 
 
 
 Ir 
 
 9k 1 < 
 
 
 ivi 
 
 hH 
 
 
 
 K ]^, 
 
 11 
 
 I'-' 
 
 Ml 
 
 ipt' 
 
 IB I 
 
 iHluio, 
 
 ■ 
 
 RwH 
 
 1 
 
 1 w 
 
 
 126 
 
 PROMISCUOUS 
 
 or any thing she has to work with. She 
 keeps her needles and thread in her house- 
 wife; and she has a pincushion on which 
 she puts her pins. She does not stick needles 
 on her sleeve, or put pins in her mouth : 
 for she has been told those are silly, danger- 
 ous tricks; and she always pays attention 
 to what is said to her. . 
 
 She takes care of her own clothes ; and 
 folds them up very neatly. She knows 
 exactly where she puts them; and I be- 
 lieve she could find them even in the dark. 
 When she sees a hole in her stockings, or 
 her frock, or any of her clothes, she mends 
 it, or asks her mother to have it mended : 
 she does not wait till the hole is large ; for 
 she remembers what her mother has told 
 her that, "A stitch in time saves nine.'*^ 
 
 She does not like to waste any thing. 
 She never throws away, or burns, crumbs 
 of bread, or peelings of fruit, or little bits 
 of muslin, or linen, or ends of thread : for 
 she has seen the chickens and the little 
 birds, picking up crumbs, and the pigs 
 feeding upon peelings of fruit, and she has 
 
READING LESSONS. 
 
 127 
 
 . She 
 house- 
 i which 
 needles 
 mouth : 
 ianger- 
 ;tention 
 
 js; and 
 knows 
 i I be- 
 le dark, 
 ings, or 
 J mends 
 lended : 
 'ge; for 
 aas told 
 Qe."^ 
 r thing, 
 crumbs 
 ttle bits 
 ad: for 
 he little 
 he pigs 
 she has 
 
 seen the ragman go about gathering rags, 
 which her mother has told her, he sells to 
 people who make paper of them. 
 
 When she goes with her mother, into the 
 kitchen and the dairy, she takes notice of 
 every thing she sees, but she does not 
 meddle with any thing without leave. She 
 knows how puddings, tarts, butter and 
 bread are made. 
 
 She can iron her own clothes ; and she 
 can make her own bed. She likes to feed 
 the chickens and the young turkeys, and to 
 give them clean water to drink, and to 
 wash themselves in; she likes to work in 
 her little garden, to weed it, and to sew 
 seeds and plant roots in it; and she 
 likes to do little jobs for her mother: she 
 likes to be employed, and she likes to be 
 
 useful* . 
 
 If all little girls would be so attentive, 
 and industrious, how they would delight 
 their parents, and their kind friends ! and 
 they would be much happier themselves, 
 than when they are obstinate, idle, or ill- 
 humoured, and will not learn any thing 
 properly, or mind what is said to them, 
 
PI 
 
 r n 
 
 I .'I I 
 
 128 PROPER NAMES. 
 
 CHAPTERS. 
 
 Names of persons and places. 
 Section 1. 
 Names of persons.J 
 
 Aa ron 
 A bel 
 A dam 
 Ag nes 
 An drew 
 An na 
 Ar thur 
 Caleb 
 Cae sar 
 Cy rus 
 Da vid 
 Ed ward 
 Em ma 
 E phraim 
 Esther 
 Fran ces 
 Fran cis 
 
 AcceQt on the first syllable. 
 
 Gil bert 
 Han nah 
 He len 
 Hen ry 
 Ho mer 
 Ho race 
 Hum phrey 
 I saac 
 i Ja cob 
 Jas per 
 Jo seph 
 Ju dith 
 Lau rence 
 Leo nard 
 Lew is 
 Lu cy 
 Mar tha 
 
 Ma ry 
 Ma thew 
 Mo ses 
 Na than 
 Pe ter 
 Phebe 
 Phi lip 
 Phil lis 
 ■Ra chel 
 Rich ard 
 Ro bert 
 Ro ger 
 Sa rah 
 Si mon 
 Ste phen 
 Tho mas 
 
 Wal ter 
 
R KAMBS. 
 
 129 
 
 Accent on the i&rst syllable. 
 
 A bi gail 
 A bra ham 
 An tho ny^, 
 Ar chi bald ?^ 
 Bar ba ra j 
 Ben ja min v 
 Ca ro line 
 Ca tha rineTr 
 Chris to pher 
 Da ni el 
 De bo rah 
 Do ro thy 
 Fre de ric 
 Ga bri el 
 I sa bel 
 
 \£ 
 
 Jef fe ry 
 Jo na than 
 Jo shu a ;• 
 Lydia ;/ 
 Mar ga ret i^ 
 Mi cha el 
 Mor de cai._^, 
 Ki cho las J) 
 O ii ver - 
 Sa mn el 
 Si nje on 
 So lo mon 
 Ti mo tliy 
 Valen tine 
 Wil li am, 
 
 ir 
 * I 
 
 
 Accent on the seoond syllable. 
 
 .itfini 4.:: ''-'^ 
 
 A me li a 
 Bar tho Ip mew 
 Cornelius 
 
 XT' 1! -a kxv4.l. 
 Jut ii 2tM &#vVi4, 
 
 B zeki el ' r 
 Na tha m el/r 
 Pe ne lo pe 
 
 'T'1-k^^ £\ vkVki lain 
 
 M 
 
wo 
 
 V V- 
 
 mwMfm- 
 
 
 nf5'!Jx.ff oU 
 
 N6r way' ^;; 
 Sweden";*; 
 
 Efisiia "^^ 
 G^6r inia riy "^ 
 Prussia '■' ^l 
 
 A& sftri a' '.r* 
 
 Bo H6mi Wf'' 
 BatS'vii ' 
 
 r ta?ly ' ^' '' 
 France 
 
 Spain •' J^iif'-:'^' 
 P6r^u.gal , 
 Fn gland- :^ 
 
 Ifftmes of places. 
 
 Countries. 
 
 lii A 
 
 
 lancl 
 
 u 'on A 
 
 i K? I i u * 
 
 » f .'., 
 
 «;!* 
 
 T(ii^ key ' '^f; 
 T&r^ai^":; 
 
 Ja pfiti , ''\ 
 EasVM'iii^k 
 
 Pfer^4k^^'"Vr 
 
 Ap^ftt'ci;' ■' ^ 
 
 MoM'66 ^^ 
 
 Td ni^ ' ■;' "':' 
 Tri pd 11 ' ' ^ 
 E' gypt 
 " Zskia 
 N€ gm land, 
 
 Nd Bi-k;!'-' :,- 
 
 ^'A'bj^^'sfrii'4 
 
 ijii 
 
 ]' 
 
rROPEIt NAMES. 
 
 t, 
 
 L I il . 
 
 .'1 .«. 
 
 )1 i. 
 
 i>« -i. 
 
 F16r da. nT 
 Ge6r gi a n> ni/i 
 Oa ro li na > fsfl 
 Vir gi ni a ib b') 
 Ma ry Iand)<^ kT 
 Penn syl villi i 
 
 New- York i / 
 
 Rhode-Islan4*'>^» 
 Verihoni - / 
 Con n^c ticut 
 New-Hamq) »biVe 
 Mas sa chu^setts 
 Ken tuciky vinf> 
 Ten nes sc^ ' 
 
 ^b. 
 
 ■I 
 
 Cana da i ? H 
 New«^Br6n§ wick 
 No va-Sc6 ti a) ' 
 N^w found lap^t 
 
 M€x i ccr^^tT tlf 
 Ca li fop niai i t^ 
 Lou i siana '- 
 T^rra-Fjr to 
 
 Pe ru''?'>t Ami'l 
 A ma z&m a iH 
 Gui a na ^>^^ 'r*?T 
 Bra zil i -^ *:^^ 
 Pa ra guayv )vi 
 Chi li F-v ha Or) 
 Pa ta go ni « H 
 
 Cities. -''^^'^ '^ ^ 
 
 Lon don 
 York :\ 
 Bris tol . 
 Glasgow 
 E'din burg 
 Cork 
 Ddb lin 
 
 U i 
 
 
 P^ ters.lmrg 
 M6s cow 
 Stock holmt • 4 
 Co pen ha gen; I 
 B6r lin 
 War saw 
 Dant zic 
 
132 
 
 FBOPEB NAMES. 
 
 Hamburg 
 A'm ster dam 
 B^t ter dam 
 L4y den 
 Ha nover 
 Vi to na 
 Prague 
 Trent ; 
 Frank fort 
 Brus tels : 
 Br^ da 
 Bk sil 
 Bern 
 Ge n^ va 
 Rome 
 Na pies 
 V^ nice 
 Man tu a 
 Leg barn 
 Turin 
 Flo renoe 
 Pa ris 
 
 A 
 
 
 Ly' ens 
 
 Ma dn'd 
 
 Bar ce 16 na 
 
 Cadiz 
 
 Lis bon 
 
 Bel grade . 
 
 Con Stan tih6 pie 
 
 A lep po 
 
 Je ru sa lem ' 
 
 A lex an dri a / 
 
 Cairo 
 
 M^c ca 
 
 Me di na 
 
 Can ton 
 
 P6kin 
 
 Que b6c 
 
 Halifax 
 
 Bos ton 
 
 Pbi la del phi a 
 
 Wash ing ton 
 
 Charles-Town 
 
 Qui to 
 
 .'VHl 
 
iJ 
 
 propeb names. 4.<^ 
 
 Section 3. 
 
 HeadiDg lesson, 
 adapted to the BecUong of this chapter* 
 
 Caroline and Amelia have had a fine 
 mornin^g walk. .They Bwjji. their. brothers, 
 Frederic apd; William jai^ithey; ^^r^fjo^a^ 
 
 ., Miinytljifiigs that arc^ usied ii^ tma^f ountry 
 
 come frona^ other places*— iFip , apd. ??^isiP% 
 
 oranges a^ l^mw^. j^BJ^^,if^^^a%^i5f{ 
 
 Italy, aqd.Jt?Q^t«g4^ Hi. ^..7/ - f n )!7r ^ 
 . Bice and sugaxi pcme fr^n^ ,th^J^ast,.^;i4 
 
 ^W'^^t-Indies. , IjtutxUe^^^ 
 p^pwr, and pther spicjp^,.eoi»pj,fi:onj.;% 
 East-Indies. . :^:,;.,j .,,,.. .j..,.^. .^^ :^, 
 „Tol;)acco grciw5 in Vir^ii^afj ipdj^ m 
 |($rolina. Tei grows, ii Olun^Jr.colfe^, m 
 Ti^key wd^he l^esf 1^^ 
 9J^esjgrowin;F^i|ceajid^^S^^ \,, , ^i. 
 (^oid apd slW come irpw Jxes^i^o ^^^c 
 ]P^mr n,ar^e,^oni Ita^^ # W^^ M 
 
 Piamonds^ pearls, ^pd otoer pre^jio^^ 
 
 ^i.^^^^ ««.^ ^/Min/1 in fViA t^nfif-Tiinies and in 
 
 South Amerioa, t,; iimiia tA • 
 
 M2 
 
iH 
 
 CHAPTER 4, 
 Promiscuous reading lefsoos* 
 
 j.t 
 
 Section 1.- 
 
 iiiii 
 
 : "-2L gotir widcvr* used to spin arid work 
 v^ry hard, in ord^ that she rqi^t maintairk 
 herself, and her little sohi ' Sto: ^bould not 
 read; btit she wished her son might learn, 
 and she si6tif him to siiHooJ. lAs he took 
 pains, he Mrn^d td read tery well, ^^^f;^ 
 , When he was about twelve! y!ears of age 
 his mother had a paralytic stroke, and lost 
 th(|l use of het limbs I so she was obliged to 
 lie in b^d ill day Ibng", and isbe could riot 
 spin, or work any more. * i;^'"^ 
 
 " As she Md, not been able to saVe aily 
 nioney, ^«}i* "fceiiul riot hire any body id 
 ijlein her house, arid to work for her; arid 
 she was very much distressed. A pbif 
 Woman whiaWA^ her neighbour teed some- 
 time^ tb eail in to assist her, and to do 
 little jobs for h^r: but her son wasf |ier 
 gireat comfort. Be ,siaid Within himself: 
 
 ■■U." i r. 
 
 • At Dundee, io Scotl«ii4 
 
 {Ua>uC» 
 
 f»ij. 
 
 ic\ 
 
READING LESSONS. 
 
 
 ['Work 
 lintairk 
 Id not 
 learn, 
 J took 
 
 i ■. . . ■• 
 
 rf ag6 
 id lost 
 g6d to 
 [d not 
 
 ! •*,<''' 
 
 Jl "'-iii^ 
 
 f yfl 
 
 e ally 
 rdy to 
 •; and 
 
 same- 
 
 to do 
 
 asf Jier 
 
 mself: 
 
 135 
 
 ^^I will not let my mother die for want. I 
 will work for her: I will maintain her. 
 God, I hope, will bless me, and prosper my 
 work." ; 
 
 He went to a manufactory that was in 
 the town where he lived; and got some 
 work. Every day, he went to the manu- 
 factory, and worked hard, harder than if he 
 had worked for himself alone; and in the 
 evening, he brought his wages to hie| poor 
 mother. Before he went in themprning^ 
 he always, cleaned the^ room for his motherj 
 and got their l^reakfast ready; and did all 
 he could to make her comfortabje^^^^ 
 W9S absent.- , , ■fff^* o- ■■', '■•- * 'rv:; '■ ■. ■ '- 
 : This good boy thought if; his mother 
 could read, she could amuse and employ 
 herself, when he was not with her: so he 
 took a great deal* of pains, and taught ker 
 to read. And when she had learned,; she 
 was highly delighted :,f^. Now," said she, 
 ^*I ap; very happy.'' I am indeed, confined 
 to my bed, and I cannot, work: but I can 
 read the Blblie, and that is a great comfort 
 
 to TTlia ♦ QTiA T Vipxr/i „ Apo A-P i\\o. K^of n-w^A 
 
 kmdest of sOns.tui 'idl ^':?iiou» u^fiop ^^ia 
 
136 
 
 PROMISCUOtS 
 
 Section ^» 
 
 The little Gardeaer's gift 
 
 A little boy had a garden ; and he had A 
 fepade, a rake, and a hoe. He was very 
 fond of working in his garden. One sum- 
 mer, he had in it a great many pretty flow- 
 ers, a lilach tree^ a gooseberry bush, and 
 som^peas. * 
 
 When his peas were large enough to be 
 picked, and his gooseberries were quite ripe, 
 he said to his sister; " I will fetch a basket, 
 and pick all my peas, and my gooseberries, 
 fcind carry them to the poor lame man on 
 the common ; he is so ill now th'^t he cannot 
 ride on the ass, as he used to do, ^d go to 
 
 ^ork." ^^'''. 
 
 So the little boy fetched his basket, "^tid 
 Was very busy picking his peas and got ^- 
 berries: and when he had picked them, he 
 carried theni immediately to the poor old 
 man, and put them on the table, and laid 
 some money on the table; all the money he 
 had. ■ "' • 
 
 The poor old mau 
 
 wSs 
 
 SitbiUg 
 
 
 
 fireside, quite alone, for his wife was gone 
 
 r 
 
READlNa LESSONS. 
 
 137 
 
 had t 
 I very 
 ) sum- 
 
 7 flow- 
 
 i^ and 
 
 to be 
 ;e ripe, 
 )asket, 
 ►erries, 
 lan on 
 cannot 
 \ go to 
 
 4 
 
 mi 
 
 got ^- 
 em, he 
 )or old 
 nd laid 
 ►ney he 
 
 \s gone 
 
 out to work, and his children were a great 
 way off. When he saw the little boy come 
 in, and saw him put the peas, and goose- 
 berries, and money on the table he smiled 
 and looked glad, and thanked him very 
 kindly. ihni 
 
 The little boy seemed very happy. His 
 sister was pleased to see him so good to the 
 poor old man, and loved him dearly. I dare 
 say when the old man eat his peas and his 
 gooseberries, and looked at his money, he 
 thought of the little boy, and said, "I hope 
 God will bless that young gentleman, who 
 is so very good to me." 
 
 - . Section 3, 
 
 The little Prisoners. 
 
 What pains the little birds take to build 
 their pretty, soft, warm nests ! How pati- 
 ently the hen sits upon her eggs, till they 
 are hatched! How diligently and affec- 
 tionately both the parents feed, and tend 
 their young ones. 
 
 A little boy having found a nest of young 
 
 he lived, took it and returned home. , As he 
 
 /^ 
 
138 
 
 PROMISCUOUS 
 
 ill 
 
 
 went along, with the nest in his hand, he 
 was surprised to see that both the parents 
 of the young birds followed him, at a little 
 distance, and seemed to watch whither he 
 was going. 
 
 He thought that they would feed the little 
 birds, if they could get at them ; so when 
 he reached home, he put the nest and the 
 young birds in a wire cage, and placed the 
 cage on the outside of a window. 
 
 The little birds were hungry, and cried 
 for food. Very soon, both the parents 
 having small caterpillars in their bills, came 
 to the cage, and gave one to each of the 
 young birds, and seemed glad to see them, 
 then, away they flew for more food. 
 
 The old birds continued to feed their 
 young ones very diligently, till they were 
 fledged, and seemed able to fly. Then the 
 little boy took the strongest of the young 
 birds, and put him upon the outside of the 
 cage. When the old birds came, as they 
 always used to do, with worms in their 
 bills, they fluttered about and seemed very 
 , glad that one of their little ones bad got 
 out of prison. 
 
READING LESSONS. 
 
 139 
 
 1, he 
 rents 
 little 
 er he 
 
 little 
 when 
 d the 
 i the 
 
 cried 
 irents 
 came 
 •f the 
 ihem, 
 
 their 
 were 
 in the 
 l^oung 
 Df the 
 5 they 
 their 
 I very 
 d got 
 
 They wanted him to fly away; but he 
 had never tried to fly, and he was afraid. 
 Then they flew backwards and forwards, 
 from the cage to the top of the chimney 
 that was near, as if to shew him how easy 
 it was to fly, and that the journey was but 
 short. At length, away he flew; and he 
 arrived safe at the top of the chimney. 
 Then the old birds fluttered about, as they 
 did when they first saw him on the outside 
 of the cage, and seemed to rejoice very 
 much. 
 
 Next day, the boy put another of the 
 birds on the outside of the cage. The old 
 birds were as glad to see him, as they had 
 been to see the other little bird, and took as 
 much pains to persuade him to fly. Then 
 the boy put out the other two birds^ Thich 
 were all he had. When all the little birds 
 were flown, neither they, nor their parents, 
 ever came back to the cage. 
 
 I think the little boy must have been 
 much more pleased when he set the young 
 birds free, than he would have been, had 
 
Hit I 
 
 140 PROMISCUOUS 
 
 CHAPTER 5. 
 
 Duties of children. 
 
 Section 1. 
 
 Love your father and mother. They 
 love you very dearly; and they have taken 
 care of you ever since you were born. 
 They loved you, and took care of you even 
 when you were poor little helpless babies, 
 that could not talk, nor walk about, nor do 
 scarcely any thing but cry, and gave a great 
 deal of trouble. 
 
 Who is so kind to ybu as your parents 
 are? Who takes so much pains to instruct 
 you? Who taught you almost everything 
 you know? Who provides food for you, 
 ^.nd clothes, and warm beds to sleep on at 
 nights? Who is so glad when you are 
 pleased, and so sorry when you are trou- 
 bled? When you are sick and in paiij, who 
 pities you, and tenderly waits upon you 
 and nurses you? Who prays to God to give 
 you health and strength, and every good 
 thing? 
 
 f\U^^-, ,-r^i-.^ -rxn-n^-ni-o T^lioTr ImOTir nP.f'.tfir 
 
 what is proper for you, than you do ; and 
 
READING LESSONS. 
 
 141 
 
 They 
 taken 
 
 born. 
 ii even 
 babies, 
 nor do 
 i great 
 
 parents 
 )stlruct 
 ' thing 
 r you, 
 > on at 
 >u are 
 e trou- 
 n, who 
 n you 
 to give 
 r good 
 
 better 
 >; and 
 
 they wish you to be good, and wise, and 
 happy. 
 
 If your parents are sick, or in trouble, 
 do all you can to comfort them. If they 
 are poor, work very hard, that you may be 
 able to assist them. Remember how much 
 they have done and suflFered for you. 
 
 Section 2. 
 
 Love your brothers and sisters. Do not 
 tease nor vex them, nor call them names ; 
 and never let your hands be raised to strike 
 them. If they have any thing whjch you 
 would like to have, do not be angry with 
 them, or want to get it from them. If you 
 have any thing they like, share it with 
 them. 
 
 Your partnts grieve when they see you 
 quarrel; they love you all with dear love; 
 and they wish you to love one another, and 
 to live in peace and harmony. it 
 
 People will not speak, or think well of 
 you, if you do not behave kindly to your 
 parents, and to your brothers and sisters. 
 *Whom," say they, '* will persons love or 
 be kind to, if they do not love their own 
 father and mother who have done so much 
 
 N 
 
\ll 
 
 iff f^ 
 
 M M 
 
 142 
 
 PROMISCUOUS 
 
 for tHerii ; and their own brothers and sis- 
 ters, who have the same parents, arid the 
 saiD^ homeasthpy have, and who are brought 
 Up with them?" 
 
 ..' . M.'J '■ -". • SficTioN 3. ^ ' ■■'■■ 
 
 Do not meddle with what does not be- 
 long to you ; nor ever take other people's 
 things without; l^ve. iiju 
 
 ; ObiWren, never allow yourselves to pluck 
 a flower, or any frtiit, that grows in your 
 parents' or other people's gardens, unless 
 you are told that you may do sO; never^ 
 witliQut leave, take a pin, or a needle, or 
 a bit of thread, from your companions: 
 never, even if your parents are very poor, 
 and have nothing to make a fire with, steal 
 wood from your neighbours' hedges^ or 
 branches from their ttees. If you steal litttle 
 things, you will soon learn to steal great 
 
 'thin^. v)'! 
 
 Whenelvfw you ate tempted to gt^m,: do 
 not say as some &Uly, naughty people do : 
 f < The«e are but little things, nobody Will 
 miss th^m: nobody sees me; and I 
 dare say In^ball n^ey be found dut." But 
 
 'f 
 
d sis- 
 d the 
 ought 
 
 bt b"e- 
 ^ople's 
 
 pluck 
 1 yiour 
 unless 
 never^ 
 Ue, or 
 inions : 
 • pooi'j 
 I, steal 
 ;eS) or 
 illfttle 
 [ great 
 
 )le do: 
 ly . will 
 and I 
 ' But 
 
 READING LESSONS. 
 
 m 
 
 say: No, I will not steajl; though np man 
 sees i?ie, yet Goid sees me; and if once I 
 begin, I shall go on stealing. Then every 
 body that knows me, will find me out,/and 
 1 shall be punisHed and despised^ and callr 
 ed a thief, and people will be afraid to trust 
 me with any thing that belongs to theinl 
 All this, I am sure, will make me very 
 miserable: and oh, what is still worse, 6oa 
 will be displeased with me; for one of his 
 great commandments is, " Thou shalt not 
 steal. '^ ; i 
 
 '* - * Section 4. 
 
 Never tell an untruth. — Wliep you are 
 rel9.ting any thing ths^t you have seen, 
 or heaxd, enrleavour to tell it exactly as 
 it was. Do not a,lter, or invent, apy 
 part, to make, a5 you may think, ^ prettier 
 story : if yovi have forg-otten apy part^ 
 say that you have forgotten it. Persons 
 who love the truth, never tell a lie, even in 
 jest. 
 
 Consider well before you liaake a pro- 
 mise. If you say you will do a thing, ani 
 
 J \JU. VIW IL iiVJL, J' V*.* TT Hi i/vii «* ■'S^) C*i*^ '•'♦' ii 
 
 o 
 
 then .will l^rust op believe you ? No persons 
 
144 
 
 PROMISCUOUS 
 
 are trusted, or believed, but those who 
 keep their promises, and who speak the 
 
 truth. 
 
 When you have done a wrong, or care- 
 less action, do not deny it, even if you are 
 afraid you will be punished for it. If you 
 are sorry for what you have done, and en- 
 deavour to do so no more, people will very 
 seldom be angry with you, or punish you. 
 They will love you for speaking the truth ; 
 they will think that they may always be- 
 lieve what you say, since they find you will 
 not tell a lie, even to hide a fault, and to 
 prevent yourselves from being punished. 
 
 It is very foolish to tell Ues ; for soon or 
 late, they are found out; and it is very 
 mean and wicked. God himself has said 
 that we must not lie; that he abhors liars, 
 and that he will punish them. 
 
 i Section 5. 
 
 Do not speak rudely to any body, or 
 quarrel with any body. 
 
 Who likes quarrelsome, ill humoured 
 people, or likes *to be with them, or takes 
 pains to oblige them? They do not look 
 
REA,DIITO VEQSari9, 
 
 US 
 
 ) who 
 k the 
 
 : care- 
 ou are 
 [f you 
 ad en- 
 1 very 
 1 you, 
 truth ; 
 ys be- 
 Du will 
 and to 
 led. 
 oon or 
 s very 
 as said 
 s liars^ 
 
 idy, or 
 
 noured 
 r takes 
 ot look 
 
 pleasant and cheerfdl. They iire t^ott at 
 all happj^. They feel quite uncoiflfQrtablm 
 They know ' they do wrong ; » apd: they 
 know that the persons #ho Hve with t^em. 
 donot h)ve tiaem, feor wifsh'to oblige itbehi 
 as they do those ^ho aile kind, and civiL 
 and good humbured. ^ • . - 
 
 When you ard disappointed of any thifl^ 
 you wished for^ do not tea^fe pfe0ple :lib©(Ht 
 It, nor. fuet^ nor cry, nor* Idok scrlleti* Ti^ 
 to think no more of it; and ahibse^l oi* 
 please, or employ yourselves, with some- 
 thing else. No persons can have everj^ 
 thitigthej^; desire. ; ;, ;-; 
 
 SECTION 6. * 
 
 When y-ouisee Hrery old ^wcoplej orpe^ple 
 whoare^vety Ugly and d^fotmed, do not 
 stare at them^or Jaufehiat them./ w^^ rtrocfc 
 
 them., -ii •>]■ ifi'- .< 7 . . ,...;':; i ' ;!n ■■:.[ :..? 
 
 Thoiigh ybn are nt)w so young mi 
 healthy^ you may be ve^ry sikik and biecdnae 
 thinj aid pale, and ^eak^ and look veiy 
 ugly; 6r you may haVe a faH and break 
 
 ftatoed, ' .. 
 
 n2 
 
tie 
 
 PROMISCUOUS 1 '4 
 
 [V 
 
 
 It.''-; 
 
 If you live to be old, your hair will be- 
 come igray, or fall off; you will lose your 
 teeth;' your faces will be covered with 
 wrinkles; you will be very weak, almost 
 like little children ; and perhaps, you will 
 be deaf, and blind, and lame. 
 
 Would you then, like that naughty boys 
 and girls should laugh at you, and play 
 you tricks? No; 1 am sure you would 
 like that every body should pity you, and 
 be kind to you, and try to help you. 
 
 Section 7. 
 
 Never amuse yourselves with giving 
 pain to any body, not even to dumb crea- 
 tures. 
 
 ;^ great many animals are WUed,^ be- 
 cause we waiit their flesh for food; and a 
 great: many are killed, because if we were 
 to let them live, they would do us harm : 
 lut I can see no reason that little boys or 
 girls should kill flies, or pull off their wings 
 or legs; or catch butterflies, and crush 
 them to death; or steal young birds from 
 their soft warni comfortable nests; or whip 
 and beat horses and asses, till their sid^9 
 
 
 
SEAOING LESSONS. 
 
 147 
 
 ill be- 
 5 your 
 with 
 ilmost 
 u will 
 
 J boys 
 i play 
 would 
 1. and 
 
 giving 
 crca- 
 
 and a 
 B were 
 harm: 
 >oys or 
 wings 
 crush 
 s from 
 
 r whin 
 
 .. — ^- 
 
 r sid99 
 
 bleed, and are very sore ; or do any cruel 
 actions. 
 
 The beasts kill one another; wolves kill 
 sheep; kites, hawks, and eagles, kill little 
 birds; and little birds kill worms and 
 flies for food, and not for sport, as some 
 I naughty children kill, or torture insects, 
 birds, and beasts. 0, it is very cruel sport 
 indeed ! 
 
 Section 8. 
 
 Do not waste any thing. If you have 
 more clothes and food than you want, do 
 not spoil them, or throw them away : but 
 give them, or ask your parents to give them, 
 to poor little boys and girls, who have no 
 clothes scarcely to put on, no meat for din- 
 ner, and perhaps no bread and milk for 
 breakfast and supper. 
 
 When any body is ill in the house where 
 you live, be very quiet, lest you should 
 disturb them. Do every thing you can to 
 make them well again. 
 
 lATnon \Ti\it 01*0 ill tr/MTi»e/ilfr/ao 
 
 
 patient : dp ppt cry, nor be ill humoured 
 
fpp ' 
 
 ill 
 
 148 
 
 PROMlSCUOU« 
 
 to the persons who are so kind as to wait 
 ti|ioti you. 
 
 Take what is given to you to make' you 
 better, with6Ut a cross word, pr look. 
 Medicines iare not pleasant t6 taste; l^ut 
 they are tnearit to do jo\x good. / 
 
 \.-l\^mnl '■ ■ BeCTION 9. • Miii'* 7t.d-;^UiiU 
 
 Ibo ribf 136 uncleanly or unti%, wKetiier 
 you are well or ill. Keep your fends, 
 and faces, and hair, and every part of your 
 body quite clean; and your clothes neat, 
 and aiijgood order. It is very unpleasant 
 to , look a^t. filthy people, or to b^ near 
 them; _ \ ; 
 
 Children^ who are kept cleauly and ti4y, 
 generally, grow much stronger and hea,lth-! 
 ier, and more cheerful and good humoured, 
 than tbpse who are seldom cleaned, and 
 who wear very filthy, ragged clo.|h^s. 
 
 f' ;!■ 
 
 h 
 
 SiscTibN* 10. 
 
 If the clothes, and the food, that are 
 given you are proper for you, do not find 
 
 ^anlf witK fli^Trt* Kiif Via f.Knntf fill for fthfiim- 
 
 f ^*.« J 
 
 though thejrare not what you like as vneli 
 as some other things. 
 
wait 
 
 i 1 1 ! J. ■ 
 
 look. 
 
 READING LESSONS. 
 
 149 
 
 r • « 
 
 h'ein^r 
 lianas, 
 if your 
 neat, 
 ea^ant 
 
 (My, 
 
 iqa,lth-! 
 our^d, 
 
 L and 
 
 /,■ ,'■'■■ 
 
 at ar^ 
 \t find 
 
 7 
 
 3is ¥neU 
 
 Do not eat more than is necessary. 
 Persons who eat too much are called 
 gluttons. They are stupid, and heavy, and 
 idle; and very often, they have a sad pain 
 in their head and stomach. 
 
 Take care of every thing that belongs to 
 you. If you have drawers of your own, 
 keep them in good order. Persons who 
 always put their things in the proper places, 
 very seldom lose any thing: when they 
 want a thing, they know where to find it ; 
 and they need not waste their time in look- 
 ing for it. 
 
 Section 11. 
 
 Do not, if you can help it, keep company 
 with children who lie, or steal or quarrel, or 
 use bad words, lest they should teach you 
 to do as they do, and that people who see you 
 with them should think and say, that you too 
 are naughty. 
 
 If the pej^ple whom you must live with, 
 behave ill, take great care not to learn 
 their bad ways. If they see that you are 
 veiy good indeed, perhaps they will learn 
 to be like you. Good people should not 
 
\ 
 
 1^0 
 
 PROMISCUOUS 
 
 learn to be like bad people; but bad people 
 should learn to be like good people. 
 
 • Section 12. 
 
 -i j 
 
 .Hfiot:tin 
 
 Do not be curious to know what rpeople 
 do not wish you to know. Vq not look at 
 their iettjBrs or what they are writing, 
 unless they give you leave ; perhaps there 
 is something in their letter^; or what they 
 are writing, whiqji they dp i:)pt,.^ii^h,yo)Li to 
 see. , . " ' ",:'-. 
 
 ^ Po not listeTi at doors, or in any places 
 wliere people who are talking, do not see 
 you, or know that you are attending to what 
 they say. v^ 
 
 Trv Section 13. f ; (i 
 
 - ... - ■-..■'■■ j * ■■? ! '.J* 
 
 Do as you are bid by those who teach 
 you. Take pains to improve in reading, 
 writing, and whatever else your parents 
 are so kind as to teach you, or wish you to 
 learn. • , t t r i ^ '» ? 
 
 Do not thirik vou know betMrthah Vour 
 parents, and your teachers. They have 
 
 livpd A Qvf^silr r^pal lorie-pr f.hnn vnii have: 
 
 ,--,',-"■!-;:- fe',":-'- "", — 0-- — ; — V — — , . ' 
 
 they ,hav^ read, apd seen, and hear^, a 
 
 n 
 
READING LESSONS. 
 
 151 
 
 People 
 
 rpeople 
 liok at 
 vrlting, 
 s there 
 at they 
 yo}! to 
 
 ^ places 
 Qot see 
 to what 
 
 teach 
 
 eading, 
 
 parents 
 
 you to 
 
 irii 
 m your 
 
 y have 
 
 u have: 
 
 eard, a 
 
 great many things which you kno\v" nothing 
 of. You have lived longer than little in- 
 fants, and you know more ; but great boys 
 and girls know more than you do.; and men 
 and women know more than great boys and 
 
 s do. , , . ^ >.. 
 
 Do not read any books, but those which 
 your parents, or teachers, give you leave 
 to read. Some books are not proper for 
 you to read: they are like bad compani- 
 ons; they teach wrong things. It is 
 better not to read at all, than to read bad 
 books. I , 
 
 Section 14^ - 
 
 Our parents are very good to us ; but 
 God is better than our parents, and he hasf 
 done more for us. He gave us our parents, 
 and every thing we have. He is iiot a 
 man; he is wiser, and better, than ariy maii 
 ever was, or ever can be. 
 
 He made the Sun,,inoon^ atid stars; the 
 earth, and the -sky; water^ trees, and 
 flowers; birds and beasts, fishes and insects; 
 and Tflen, Women, and children, . 
 
 . ; He ha^ made us mo^e ex<5^llent than the 
 
158 
 
 PROMISCUOUS 
 
 beaSs ; for he has given us a soul. It is 
 our soul that knows God, and that he is 
 good, and wise, and powerful. The beasts 
 do not know God, nor the things which he 
 has made ; if we were to tell them, they 
 would not understand us. Our souls learn 
 and know a great many things, which the 
 beasts cannot learn. Our bodies will die 
 like the beasts. When we are laid in the 
 grave, worms will devour our flesh, and 
 our bones will crumble into dust. But 
 our souls are immortal; they will never 
 die. 
 
 God orders every thing. He keeps us 
 alive ; and he makes us die when he pleases. 
 There is nothing which he cannot do. He 
 sees us wherever we are, by night as well as 
 by day ; and he knows all that we do and say, 
 and think. There is nothing which he does 
 not know. 
 
 Section 15. 
 
 We must love God. Good people love 
 him more than they love any thing, or any 
 person in the world. They never rise in 
 the morning oi lie down at night, without 
 thinking of him and of the good he has 
 
RBADINO LESSONS. 
 
 153 
 
 It is 
 ; he is 
 beasts 
 lich he 
 I, they 
 s learn 
 ich the 
 ill die 
 
 in the 
 h^ and 
 . But 
 
 never 
 
 ;eps us 
 pleases. 
 ). He 
 well as 
 nd say, 
 be does 
 
 le love 
 
 or any 
 
 rise in 
 
 without 
 
 he has 
 
 done them. Often in the day, they think 
 of him; ai)d they love to talk, and hear, 
 and read abput him. 
 
 We must pray to Gtod; that is, we must 
 tell him that we know he is very good, and 
 worthy to be loved; thai we hope he will 
 forgive us when we do wrong,, put good 
 thQUghts infrp our minds, and help fis to be 
 better and better; and that he will bless us, 
 and our parents, and.all our kind friends, and 
 give us every good thing that is proper for 
 us. 
 
 We must do to all persons what God 
 requires us to do. ft is his will that we 
 should not be unkind, even to people 
 who afe unkind to us: and that we should 
 do to all persons as ^e wish they would do 
 
 h^V'""' 
 
 to us. J ' 
 
 The things that God requires of us will 
 make us: good, and happy. If w^jdo them 
 not, he will be displeased with us, and pu- 
 nish us. He dan) punish us in whatever way 
 he pleases. He cm take av/ay all our friends, 
 and every- tiling that he has-giveujus; and 
 
 for ever. But if we try to do good, and to 
 do a? he would have us to do, he will help 
 
 o 
 
154 
 
 PROMISCtOtI« 
 
 US to be good ; he will bless us ; he will 
 make us feel happy in our minds: and 
 when we die, that is, when our souls leave 
 our bodies, he will take us into heaven ; 
 where we shall be with him, and know, and 
 love, and praise him better than any body in 
 this world can know, and love, and praise 
 him. Then we shall never grieve any more ; 
 we shall never do wrong any more : we shall 
 be wiser, and happier, than any body who 
 lives here, can be, or can imagine. 
 
 Section 16. 
 
 We must love to read the Bible. It is the 
 most excellent and beautiful of all books. 
 God himself commanded good men to write 
 it. There we read of all the great and 
 good things God has done for us, and for 
 all people; how just and wise and powerful 
 he is; and what we must do to serve and 
 please him. There, we read of good men 
 who loved God and whom he loved and 
 blessed ; of Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob, of 
 
 •w- 1 "%€ C!».«««ir^1 ar%A T^avtA 
 
 tlOSepn, JSiUbUS, «aiiiW^A w,aa« jur«Ta«, 
 
READING LEaSONS. 
 
 155 
 
 There too, we read of Christ, who was so 
 good, and who has done so much for us. 
 
 He never did harm to any body; He 
 never did any thing that was wrong. He 
 was gentle and patient when he was troubled 
 and when he was ill used ; he was 1^ ind to all 
 persons, even to those who were unkind to 
 him: and when wicked men were just 
 going to kill him, he prayed to God to 
 forgive them. 
 
 When we have read or heard about Christ, 
 and who he was, and what great things he 
 has done for us, we must love him, and 
 be thankful to him, and try to be like 
 him. 
 
 Children make haste to learn to read, and 
 to understand the meaning of what you read, 
 love to learn your duty, and to do it, then 
 you will be able to read the Bible, and you 
 will love to read it. — ^There are many things 
 in it which you can understand now, though 
 you are so young. When you are older 
 and wiser, you will understand it better ; and 
 if you are good, you will delight in it more 
 and more. 
 
]'.' 
 
 156 
 
 v; CHAPTER 6. 
 
 t 
 
 Figures and numbers. 
 
 . -jf^n -. I 
 
 -I '':■■■ -. . ' ^ l: ' ... Jlrabic/.:- 
 
 'Rdaiaii. 
 
 One ' 1 • 
 
 I. 
 
 Two 2 
 
 IT. 
 
 Three 3 
 
 TIT. 
 
 Four 4 
 
 ■■' iv. • 
 
 Five : -' ■••^ 6 
 
 v. 
 
 Six 6 
 
 VI. 
 
 Seven 7 ^^' 
 
 " vii. 
 
 Eight 8 
 Nine 9 
 
 vtii. 
 
 IX. 
 
 Ten • 10 
 
 X. 
 
 Eleven 11 
 
 XI. 
 
 Twelve 12 
 
 XII. 
 
 Thirteen 33 
 
 XTII. 
 
 Fourteen 14 
 
 XIV. 
 
 Fifteen 15 
 
 XV. 
 
 Sixteen 16 
 
 XVJ. 
 
 Seventeen 17 
 
 XVII. 
 
 Eighteen 18 
 Nineteen 19 
 
 XVIII. 
 XIX. 
 
 Twenty 20 
 Twenty five 25 
 
 XX. 
 XXV. 
 
FIOURIS AND NUMBERS. 
 
 157 
 
 H 
 
 
 Arabic, 
 
 Roman. 
 
 Thirty 
 
 ^ flKi 30 
 
 XXX. 
 
 Thirty five 
 
 35 
 
 XXXV. 
 
 Forty 
 
 40 
 
 .'jiiJiXL, 
 
 Fortv five 
 
 45 
 
 XLV. 
 
 Fifty 
 
 60 
 
 L. 
 
 Fifty five 
 
 55 
 
 LV. 
 
 Sixty 
 
 60 
 
 tx. 
 
 Sixty five 
 
 65 
 
 LXV. 
 
 Seventy _ , 
 
 70 
 
 LXX. 
 
 Seventy five 
 
 75 
 
 LXXV. 
 
 Eighty 
 
 80 
 
 LXXX. 
 
 Eighty five 
 
 85 
 
 LXXXV. 
 
 Ninety 
 
 90 
 
 XG. 
 
 One hundred 
 
 100 
 
 C. 
 
 Two hundred 
 
 200 
 
 CO. 
 
 Three hundred 
 
 300 
 
 ccc. . 
 
 Four hundred 
 
 400 
 
 ccce. 
 
 Five hundred 
 
 500 
 
 D. 
 
 Six hundred 
 
 600 
 
 DC. 
 
 Seven hundi'ed 
 
 700 
 
 DCC. 
 
 Eight hundred 
 
 800 
 
 DCCC. 
 
 Nine hundred 
 
 900 
 
 DCCCC. 
 
 One thousand 
 
 ' 1000 
 
 M. 
 
 o2 
 
i ,u 
 
 158 
 
 / ( 
 
 CHAPTER 7. 
 
 7;t-ii:!T 
 
 / ■" 
 
 vri vi-, ; 
 
 Abbreviations used in writing and printing. 
 
 A. 3. or B. A. Bachelor of 
 
 Arts. C * 
 
 Abp. Archbishop. * v 
 A. D. In the year of our "tord. 
 A. K or M. A. Master of 
 
 A. M.^ In the year of th| world. 
 
 A. M. Before noon. r»{* 
 P. M. Aftfeirnoon. U( ! 
 
 B. D. Bachelor of Divinity. 
 D. D. Doctor of Divinity, 
 Bp. Bishop. 
 
 Babt. Baronet. (y^y-^j 
 
 Col. Colonel 
 
 ih 
 
 0. S.. Keeper of the SitiVf 
 
 '6 
 
 i"* 
 
 C. P. S. Keeper of the Prity 
 
 Seal. ^^^''•^' 
 
 Esq. Esquire. 
 
 F. L. S. Fellow of the Linnse- 
 
 an Society. t>"? B V tl ; 
 F. A. S. Fellow of the Ahti- 
 
 quarian Society; 
 F. R. S. Fellow of .the Royal 
 
 Society; ■ V^jI^,;:; 
 V. R. -Victoriarthd'QueeHUj . l 
 Hon. Honourable • ni/1 
 
 J. H. S. JesuA th« Sbtiour of^ 
 
 Men. ^ ^v'-»Ii^i o^^:^ 
 
 J, D. Doctof of Xaw 
 
 ■ ■ - ''fit' 
 
 Knt. Knightk 
 liUtcT. Lieutepvvtf J , j , ^ , j 
 L. S. Plaoe^^he Scial^i , 
 L. L. D. Dbcttti df th^ duum^ 
 
 andoitiri^ ^ ^ 
 
 » 
 
 M. D. Doctor iii Physic; 
 Hitin Mister. 
 
 A, 
 
ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 11^ 
 
 V ■ 
 
 Royal 
 
 * -nn/!: 
 
 [J ow . 
 
 Liii >" 
 1^1-^ -.■ 
 datUtt 
 
 Mas. Mistress. • H. ' fti^/HfcAf*- Right Honourable. 
 
 M. S. Oacred to tjie Memory;.! Siv Saint. , ^,^5^^ | ,, tj|srir,jT 
 M. P. Member of Pavliameljt. ;S..T^;P. Professor of Divinity. 
 
 Ms. Manuscript. 
 Mss. Manuscripts. 
 N. B. Mark Well 
 Np. Nilmber. 
 li^rS. NewStyi^. 
 O. S. OW Style. 
 OxoN. Oxford. 
 
 Xt. Christ 
 
 Xtn. Christian. 
 
 Vvi: 'th^ last 
 
 Ib. or Ibid. Th^ sam^ place. ' 
 
 Ji). The same. \ '^t\ 
 
 Ei G. or V. G. JA for itaraplf^ 
 
 L E. That is. 
 
 Philom. A. lover of the^a- Q, D. As if he should say. 
 
 . thematics. Q. L. As<much^ you^lease.V 
 
 Per Cknt. By the hundred. Q, S. A. sufficifetit quantity. - 
 
 P. M. G. Professor of Music V. For Vide. See. 
 
 at Gresham Coll^g*»k Vk. Ife'or Yidblioet. That is 
 
 P S. Po8tci;ij»t. . \, 
 
 Q. Queen. ^ ^^^ ,w,u^^^ 
 
 Reg. Prof. King's Profes^ Ao. et cetera, an4 so forth. 
 
 to say. 
 &, And. 
 
 sor. 
 
 u\A :rvj> 0\\'v^ 
 
 
 ■^Kum;^. 
 
w.ri 
 
 160 
 
 CHAPTER 8. 
 
 Reading lessons, in Italic, and Old English, 
 and manuscript letters. 
 
 I 
 
 
 Section 1. 
 
 
 
 
 « 
 
 
 Italic letters. 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 A 
 
 B 
 
 C D E F 
 
 a 
 
 H 
 
 I 
 
 J 
 
 K 
 
 h M N 
 
 p 
 
 Q 
 
 R 
 
 S 
 
 T 
 
 U V W X 
 
 Y 
 
 z 
 
 
 
 
 ,••) !j-|'T' . \ 
 
 .1 
 
 )*H>'lz() . 
 
 .'". ■ 
 
 a 
 
 ^ 
 
 c d e -ff 
 
 Sf 
 
 h 
 
 • 
 
 % 
 
 • 
 
 J 
 
 k 
 
 I m n 
 
 p 
 
 9 
 
 r 
 
 s 
 
 t 
 
 ..Mi-.'};.',-.*, W : X 
 
 y 
 
 :Z 
 
 
 Select Sentences. 
 
 Do to others as you wish they should do 
 to you* 
 
 How pleasant it is to live with persons j 
 who are kind and cheerful^ and willing 
 to oblige; who never take^ or keep, what 
 does 7iot belong to them: and who always 
 speak the ti'utht 
 
ITALIC LETTfiRS. 
 
 161 
 
 When you are told of a faulty endea- 
 vour to avoid it afterwards. 
 
 We must not do wrong ^ hetaUse we see 
 others do so. ' 
 
 Be not afraid to do what is right and 
 proper for you to do. ' 
 
 Never ask other personS tSdB-h^y thing 
 for you, which you can as properly do for 
 yourselves. ' rtV^^nVvs 
 
 As soon as you have learned to work 
 well, try to work quick. 
 
 If we do not take paMs, we must not 
 expect to excel in ang thing. 
 
 Attentive and indUstHons pebple can 
 always find time to do what is proper for 
 them to do. 
 
 How comfortahle it is to feel that rve 
 dearly love our parents, our brothers and 
 sistei's, and idl our relations and friends ; 
 and to know that they love us, and wish 
 to serve us, and make us happy. 
 
 Persons who desire to gain knowledge, 
 listen to their instructors with attention 
 and respect.^ '" 
 
 jLguoTant,jOGiiSfi aiivi oostmate persons 
 are very disagreeable to others^ and un- 
 happy in themsehes. 
 
. 'Ill 
 
 162 
 
 
 ITALIC LETTERS. 
 
 The Parrots. 
 
 Two parrots were confined together in a 
 large cage. The cup which held their food 
 was put at the bottom of the cage. They 
 commonly sat on the same perch^ and close 
 beside each other. Whenever one of them 
 went down for food^ the other always fol- 
 lowed; and when they had eaten enough, 
 they hastened together to the highest perch 
 of the cage. 
 
 They lived four years in this state of 
 confinement ; and always shewed a strong 
 affection for each other. At the end of this 
 time J the female grew very weak, and had 
 all the marks of old age. Her legs swelled 
 and she was no longer able to go to the bot" 
 torn of the cage to take her food: but her 
 companion went and brought it to her. 
 He carried it in his bill and emptied it in-* 
 to hers. 
 
 This affectionate bird continued to feed 
 his mate^ in this manner for four months. 
 But her weakness increased every day. 
 
 A t In at shp ii^ns tinnhlp. in sit nri the. nerch : 
 
 and remained crouched at fJie bottom 
 of the cage. Sometimes she tried to get 
 up to the lower perch but was not able. 
 
ITALIC LBTtBRSi 
 
 1C3 
 
 Her componion did all he could to as* 
 sist her. Be often took hold of the upper 
 part of her wing with his billy and tried 
 to drow her up to him. His looks and 
 his motions showed a great desire to help 
 her^ and to make her sufferings less. 
 
 But the sight was still jnore affecting, 
 when the female was dying. Her dis- 
 tressed companion went round and round 
 her a long time without stopping. He 
 tried at last to open her billy that he 
 might give her some food. His trouble 
 increased every moment. He went to 
 and from her, with the utmost appear- 
 ance of distress. Sometimes he made 
 the most mournful cries: at other times, 
 he fixed his eyes on his mate, and was 
 silent; but his looks shewed the deepest 
 sorrow. His companion at lenght died: 
 and this affectionate and interesting bird 
 grew weaker and weaker from that time ; 
 and lived only a few months. 
 
 This is an aff^ecting lesson to teach us 
 to be kind and loving^ and very help- 
 ful fn nrtP nnnthp.r • and tO thoSC VCrSOnS 
 
 in particular who are nearly connected 
 with usy and who stand in need of our 
 assistance^ 
 
164 
 
 Section 2. 
 
 Old English. 
 
 '% 
 
 f 
 
 0||r $ ttt ir to ^|| 
 
 Manuscript. 
 
 J 
 
 a, u c^ . , ^ e 
 
 ^ /^ 9fl fl o 
 
 tp 
 
 u 
 
 ^. 
 
 tiA 
 
 a> 
 
 I 
 
 z 
 

 o 
 
 ^M 
 
 
 r 
 
 J2J 
 
 t? 
 
 Wotfe^ 83ftii|tiy ^^ same i^Udt^M, feA^i^ 
 
 Air, ^e 6if iiie^l^ 
 /feti^, Me ^iio ffiKli^ I 
 
 rits. •::'^.'^;, ''^'■:;- J 
 
 As cc»^, j^&g'Up., ' 
 
 At ten djoMcCf WiiiMg*^ 
 At t^Mnt^ Walt^^ 
 
 ffprl to Wm\bf 
 
 Beer, ta carty tM 
 
 ^eari a beast* 
 
 
 Blue, a m^£ • '^'^ 
 jBoa?^ a beast. 
 
 Bought a br&ii. ' , 
 
 
 * By flfM^f^latiA^izl tlii» diapter, such wo^ opi^ «l^ M% 
 precisely th^ same soundi 'w^ assist the learner in his pro-, 
 nunciation, as well as enable him to distingoish the meaning 
 of words sounded alike^ 
 
 P 
 
166 
 
 WORDS SOUNDBD ALIKB« 
 
 Bread, food. 
 Bred, brought yp 
 Cell, a hut or cave. 
 Sdl, to dispose oil 
 Sent, did send* 
 Scent, itoell. 
 Ceil ing, of a room. 
 Seal ing, fixing a seal. 
 Coarse, not fine. 
 Course, race or wa^. 
 Com pie ment, the full 
 y number. 
 Compli ment, civil 
 
 expression. 
 Dear, costly. 
 Deer, a wild beast. 
 Dew, on the grass. 
 Due, owing. 
 Faint, feeble. 
 Feint, a pretence. 
 'Fmr/just. J 
 
 Fare, provisions. 
 Flea, an insect. 
 iP/ee, to run from daa- 
 
 ger. 
 J\h^^ filthy. 
 
 Fowl, a bird. 
 
 (xUt, with gold. 
 
 Guilt, sin. 
 
 Cifra^e, for. coals* 
 
 6rrm^ large. 
 
 IZir:, a beast. 
 
 Hear^ the seat of 
 life. 
 
 Hair, of the head. 
 
 Hare, a beast. 
 
 HeaZ, to cure. 
 
 Heel, part of the 
 foot. 
 
 Hear, to hearken. 
 
 Here, in this place. 
 
 Hew, to cut. 
 * Hue, colour. 
 
 Hole, a cavity. 
 , Whole, total* 
 ' Knew, did know. 
 
 iVct(;, hot worn, or 
 used. 
 
 XeaA:, to run out. 
 .JLeek, an herb. 
 
 Lead, metal. 
 
 Xedf, did lead. 
 
 
 ■*';>■>*!*, 
 
W0BD8 S^UNDBD ALIKB. 
 
 167- 
 
 leat of 
 [lead. 
 
 !• 
 
 if the 
 
 rken. 
 place. 
 
 ow. 
 om, or 
 
 out. 
 
 Les sen, to make less. 
 Les son, a precept. 
 Mean, low. 
 Mien, appearance. 
 Meat, food. 
 Meet, to assemble. 
 Mete, to mea^ture. 
 Moan, to lament. 
 Mourn, cut down. 
 Oar, to row with. 
 Or«, metal. 
 Pain, uneasiness. 
 Pane, square of glass. 
 Pair, a couple. 
 Pare, ta cut off. 
 Pear, a fruit. 
 Peace, quiet. 
 Piece, a part. 
 Peer, a nobleman. 
 PicTy a column. 
 Plactf a situation. 
 Plaice, a fish. : 
 Prai/, to bef iech. i 
 Prey, plunder. 
 Raise, to lift up. 
 Rays, sun beams. 
 
 Rn.zP- to (^ftTnnlisli^ 
 
 • 
 
 \ 
 
 Rain, from the 
 clouds. 
 
 Reign, to rule. 
 
 Rein, of a bridle. 
 
 Rest, repose. 
 
 Wrest, to force. 
 
 Rye, com. 
 
 ^ry, crooked. 
 
 Right, }xiBti 
 
 Rite Sk ceremony 
 
 Wright, an artifi- 
 cer. 
 
 W^n>, toiiseapen 
 
 Sail, of a chip. 
 
 Sale, selling. 
 
 /Scene, the stage» 
 
 Seen, beheld. 
 
 Sea, the ocean. 
 
 See, behold. 
 
 Seam, edges Bewed. 
 
 Seem, • to appear. 
 
 Sow, to scatter seed. 
 
 Sew, to work with a 
 needle. 
 
 Sleight, dexterity 
 
 Slight, to despise 
 
 
 ■p. 
 
Nr""-"' 
 
 mn 
 
 Wqi«,P| Spip^DKP Ai^XKB. 
 
 M\ 
 
 iS/^y tardy. .. lioia 
 iSofc, of the foot v>v 'VV 
 iSottZ/dpirtfc'' ^<» »^^^^^^ 
 Soar, to fly aloft. '' •)} 
 SorCf an ulc^iv, 
 Some, apart. .^ ^,^^.<|| 
 >Stfm, the wiiole^ V :'*V« 
 Sow, a ttiale (JhiM. 
 iS«», tlid cjatise of day. 
 iS^eaZ, to pilfer. ' >%t 
 
 Stile, a p9K9li^«:i ,*^kiV, 
 6^r2/Zer iHJDgua^e.. ' 
 Straight i iot trooked. 
 
 Su^ ^^o^j^. ,^^^ 
 
 Suck et$ 9^ Wn^» A^^. 
 ^toily tbe end#)i (V^/ri 
 
 TA^irj of tbom* 
 There, in that place ^ 
 
 ^Tm;o, i^coiij^rel 
 ,Toe; 9^|bl© )5dP^ 
 
 Fa/cy a/valleyi 
 Fct^^'a covet* 
 Fain, worthlfeSi^. 
 Fawc, ^ VipAtW- 
 
 f cock,, ! ; , . 
 
 'Fcm,.a blood )TQ»- 
 
 i sel. .liiitf .; 
 
 Waist, of tlic bodr,^ 
 
 fFiwfe;^108^^^ V "^'"'^ 
 Weaiclifxot^^onf^ • < 
 ^efii^ s^y^n day^* 
 Yew, a tree, .^t^^j^' 
 Youijmpel'reB. 
 
 I 
 
 ^ 
 
 ;!m} 
 
 i[i"vaf 
 
 •4V» <>': /r: Vbi 
 
 MS 
 
 m 
 
WORDS OPTBN COPfVOTJNDSD. 
 
 ie9 
 
 a«. 
 
 ; place 
 
 ft' . 
 
 v^ 
 
 m. 
 
 jfr- 
 
 > 
 
 ireflr. 
 
 ^^< 
 
 ' \ 
 
 
 
 •■ . /« ': Vi I \. 
 
 CHAPTER 10. 
 
 Words which are often improperly confounded, in 
 spelling or pronunciation, or hoth. 
 
 Ce h njy a species of parsley. 
 Sa la ry^ stated hire. 
 
 Con certj harmony. 
 Con wrr, conapanion. 
 
 Coun cUy persons met in consultation. 
 Cottfi «eZ, advice, direction. 
 
 E mergey to rise, to mount from obscurity. 
 Im merge, to put under water. 
 
 E mi nenty high, exalted. 
 
 Im mi nenti impending, at hand. 
 
 Ge ni us, mental power, peculiar disposition. 
 Ge nus, class containing many species. 
 
 Inge nidM, inventive, possessed of genius. 
 In ge nu otu, candid, generous. 
 
 To lay, to place, to quiet. 
 To lict to be in a reclining posture, to rest. 
 
 p2 
 
M 
 
 .1 
 
 ,^l»i| 
 
 ITOi 
 
 W08»9 OFTBi* ^OPtf^UNOEJ^, ; 
 
 iif 
 
 I'i 
 
 £zc^ cr ishj nice in the choice of food, 
 
 Li CO ricBy a 
 
 J'- 
 
 ^ 
 
 J .OOhOifOliiOJli 7i-f9q<>*iqafi U-UfO ^lil- ri .'ii): 
 
 •/? ef' 
 
 Ordi 
 
 law orrale^ 
 
 Hi 
 
 
 Ordnance, cannon^^^j^g^ ^n?.^^^^^^ ^ ^ 
 
 P^r se cute, to pursue with lhtili(5e. 
 
 Fro se cute, to continue, to sue at law.. ,^ ^ .,, 
 
 Prm ce jpaZ, a head, a sum- placed fetint^tfei^t. ' 
 Prin a pZ(j, first cau§e, fuj:).4^i|^ent9J truth. ^ , 
 
 Re lie, Tem&inieT. .i"'io-.uG . ' '.r .V- vno 
 
 Pre ce dent, a rulfedlf cxaiil)»lte. "'* "' ''">i^-''« ""^ 
 Pre si dent, one at the biead pf others, - -, 
 
 S<a ft*e, an imag^i"'' - -■;^"!^"^'"'" .^«-^« ^''^ -' 
 
 %.?:«{?(-a, law,,;;,. ,,.,,, ..,,,,,,-,, i.;im,n ,f- •.: ■; 
 
 Te nor, geti^t&X cotirse <st dnft. • - v - 
 Te jjttre,,the,i|iaifi]jgr,,9fhp^4jng,f8t?^^^^ , • 
 
 Tracifc, mark left.'ti'Jdaa;' -' 'f»"« •*«^' ' > '^^A ' ^ 
 Trart, a country, a qviaBLtity;Of,lftT^cl.,,^ .,i;j ..'^ 
 
 
WORDS SPEL^EP AJUI^^* 
 
 ll71' 
 
 m ^f''; //'•' 
 
 
 !^T;>::i m>'} 
 
 ruth, r, 
 
 *t * 
 
 
 * *■ 
 
 
 ^^.s 
 
 ,<i» S.\ 
 
 
 CHAPTER, U. 
 
 Words spelled alike, but which diifer in pi*6- 
 nunciation and meaning. \. 
 
 Con duct, manageinent, behaviottfr ^^^ " 
 To con duct, to lead, to direipt. 
 
 ^ con test, a dispute, dinerence. 
 
 To'ton^est, to^ strive, to contend. i. ^m K 
 
 i: ;r'; 
 
 Fre ^'wewif, often seen, often occurring. 
 
 Tofre quent, to visit often. '' ' ■ - n^-^ 1. 
 
 il wi wwre, the sixtieth part of an hour. 
 Minute^ small, slender. 
 
 .471 object, that on wliich one is employed. . 
 Tb o&yec^, to oppose.* / ;" ' v. -^ 
 
 ^1 subject, one who is governed. 
 To subject, to make subnaissive. 
 
 ^ pr^ 5e7?!f, a gift, a donation. 
 To pre sent, to give, to show. 
 
 A tor ment, pain, misery. 
 
 To tor mefu, to put in pain, to vex. 
 
i 
 
 m\ 
 
 172 
 
 WORDS SPBLfiED ALIKB. 
 
 i 
 
 A teavy water from the eyes. 
 To tear^ to pull in pieces. 
 
 A sow, a female hog. 
 
 To sow, to scatter seed in the ground, 
 
 A bow, an instrument of war. 
 
 To bow, to bend the body in respect. 
 
 A mow, a loft where hay or corn is laid up. 
 To mow, to cut with a scythe. 
 
 A house, a place to live in. 
 
 To house, to harbour, to shelter. 
 
 Use, advantage, custom. 
 
 2b use, to employ to any purpose. 
 
 Close, shut fast, confined. 
 To close, to shut, to finish. 
 
 Grease, the soft part of the fat. 
 To grease, to smear with grease. 
 
 An ex cuse, an apology. 
 
 To ex cuse, to admit an apology. • 
 
 • The last Ive pair of words, art ditiinguishc-d by th« s in iho flnrt word 
 MnA iLarp; and io (b« Moood flat, Ukt i. 
 
 
lid up. 
 
 IRBEGULAB PEONUNCIATiON. 17.3 
 
 CHAPTER 1^. 
 
 Words in which the pronunciation differs 
 * remarkably from the spellingk ^ 
 
 ithQflnrtword 
 
 Spelling. ProDunciatioD. 
 i4i«Z^..,fii?.Isle. 
 
 A pron, . , .A i^um. 
 
 Beaux Boes. 
 
 ^eZ/c . • • ♦ ♦ *Bell. 
 Bis cuit, , • .Bis kit. 
 Boat 5tt?aw?/. .Bo sen. 
 
 « ■ ' 
 
 J5i^r?/..-.. *Ber re. 
 Bu sy,,^ ...Biz ze. 
 
 ffi'S 
 
 Spelling. Pronunciation. 
 
 Halfpence ,Ha pe^ceu 
 Haut boy . . . Hp Doy. 
 Hie cowgA... Sic cup 
 Bouse wife,^13(^z zii 
 1 row.,.*- j^rn. 
 Xiieu ten aw^.Lev ten an^. 
 
 One .Wun* 
 
 Once ^unce. 
 
 Bu si ncss^^l^iz ness. Phthi sic, . .Tiz zic. 
 
 Cat sup. 4. • .Catch up. Ra gout, . - -Ea goo, 
 
 Coci^ii;aiw..Cok sen. Schedule,.,, ^eA^^'^f 
 
 Co lo mifg, .^ Cur lie],. Schism . . - .Sizm^ ; 
 
 Corps ^.» ^ , .Core. ' Schis ma ric.Siz ma tic. 
 
 Cu cum her .Cow cwfa-Seven night. Sen nit. 
 
 hex. Sub tie . .• .Sut tie. 
 
 Cup board . • Cub burd. Two Too. 
 
 Cri tique. , .Crit teek. Vic tu als, . Vit tlz. 
 
 E clat E claw. Waist coat, . Wes kot. 
 
 Ewe . * . • ^ .Yu. Wo men . . . Wim men. 
 
 Gaol , , * . ^. , Jail. Yachi . . . • . Yot* 
 
 i?a^ j?c®«^ .Hapenpa* 
 
174 
 
 VULGAR ERRORS. 
 
 CHAPTER 13. 
 
 Words 'syhich are often pronounced very 
 
 erroneously. * 
 
 
 Bile for boil. 
 Tint for pdint. 
 Pyzonyor poison. 
 Cheer ybr chair. 
 Ketch for Catch. 
 Yournybr yours. 
 Kernybr hers. 
 Hizenyor his.- 
 Wealfor veal; 
 Renshyor rinse. 
 Fift/or fifth. 
 Sixtybr sixth. : - 
 Gether ybr gather. 
 Kittle^or kettle. 
 Sitheybr sigh. - 
 Tower for tour. 
 Sarcer^or saucer. 
 
 Dixonary^or dictionary 
 Hair yor air. - 
 
 Air for hair. - 
 
 Harrowybr arrow; 
 Arrow for harrow^ 
 Drowndedybr drowned. 
 Naturybr nature. 
 Creturybr creature* 
 Lunnunyir Landon. 
 Winder ybr window. 
 Sittiationybr situation. 
 Eddicationybr education. 
 Cirkilation for circula- 
 tion, 
 libary^or library. 
 Winegarybr vinegar. 
 
 * Though the manner in which these words, and othiers of 
 
 a similar nature, are frequently pronounced, is extremely 
 
 erroneous, yet as young persons of education, as well *i 
 
 others, are apt to imitate what they hear, it is proper to 
 
 • .• • . _ i _ _„'-^* 
 
 i^uai'ii iiiem u^aiui>b ov corrupi; n prouiiuciauoQ. 
 
 W( 
 
 
 
 nun 
 atte 
 •uc] 
 
 ta 
 
TERMINATIONS. 
 
 175 
 
 CHAPTER 14. 
 
 Words in which the terminations ar^ er, or, 
 
 our, and re, have exactly the same sound, 
 
 viz. that of wr.* 
 
 Beg gar. 
 Col lar. 
 Dol lar. 
 Nee tar. 
 Pillar. 
 Scho lar. 
 
 Dto ger. 
 Qan der. 
 Lodg er. 
 Sing er. 
 Sup per. 
 Ush er. 
 
 Su gar. 
 Vul gar. 
 Ce dar. 
 Fri ar. 
 Liar 
 Mor tar. 
 
 Cham ber. 
 Ci der^ 
 Gro cer. 
 Speak er. 
 Strang er. 
 Wa fer. 
 
 * Though the words comprised in this chapter, are not 
 numerous, they aro perhaps sufficient to excite the learnur'a 
 attention both to the orthography and the pronunciation of 
 •uch words. 
 
176 
 
 icmi^ 
 
 ALIRB. 
 
 Ac tor. • 
 
 Au thor. 
 
 Debtor. 
 
 Juron in 
 
 Doctor. 
 
 May or. . 
 
 Li quor. 
 
 Mi nor. 
 
 Ma nor. 
 
 Tai lor. 
 
 Pas tor. 
 
 Trai t(>r. 
 
 Rec toTi 
 
 Tutor. 
 
 ■,..i. 
 
 Ar moiir. 
 
 Sue c^urv 
 
 Can doUTi. 
 
 Va loun t 
 
 Co lour. 
 
 Vi gour. ; 
 
 Har bour. 
 
 La bour. 
 
 Ho nour. 
 
 Favour. - 
 
 Ran conn 
 
 Neigh bour*) 
 
 Splen dour; ^ 
 
 Hu mour. t 
 
 Cen tre* 
 
 Me tre. 
 
 Lus tre. 
 
 Mea gre. 
 
 Seep tre. 
 
 Mi tre. 
 
 Spec tre« 
 
 Ki tre. 
 
 A ere. 
 
 Sa bre* 
 
 Fi bre. 
 
 Salt pe tre. 
 
 Lu ere. 
 
 Se pul chre. 
 
CHAPTER 15. 
 
 Words in which the initial letters e and i are 
 
 often j^aisapplied.* 
 
 Em balm. 
 Em bez zle. 
 Em po ver iab. 
 En camp. 
 En chant. . 
 En close. 
 En croach. 
 En dite. 
 En dorse. 
 Eli force. 
 En gross. 
 Enjoija. 
 En list. 
 En roll. 
 En shrine. 
 En sure. 
 En tail. 
 En tteat. 
 
 Im bit ter. 
 Im bo dy. 
 Im bol den. 
 Im.bp som. 
 Im bru^. 
 Im bue. 
 Im plant. 
 Im pri son. 
 In crease. 
 In cum ber. 
 In flame. 
 In gen der. 
 In graft. 
 In quire. 
 In snare. 
 In trust. 
 In twine. 
 In wrap. 
 
 . 1 . 1 .1 
 
 >tmAf\ 
 
 tiiJ;7i>?; 
 
 * These letters, in the words of this chapter, are properly 
 annlied- a«eordiBfif to Df- Johnaon'a DiotionarT'. 
 
INTRODUOnON 
 
 TO THS SUBSEQUENT OHAFTEBS. 
 
 The learner has hitherto been occupied with the mere 
 practical part of spelling. It is proper nov to present him 
 with a few of the simple rules and principles, by which the 
 practice is goyemed. They will lead him to reflect, with 
 advantage, on the various powers of the letters, and on the 
 connection and influence which subsist amongst them ; and 
 as they are in many instances, illustrated by a considerable 
 number of examples, they will be the more intelligible to 
 young minds, and make a stronger impression. In a 9pel< 
 liBif-book, to omit rules for spelUng ; and in a book which 
 teaches pronunciation to omit rules respecting the sounds of 
 the letters *, might justly be deemed very culpable omissionB. 
 If these rules are not now, in some degree inculcated, they 
 will probably, in future, be hastily passed over if not entire- 
 ly neglected. 
 
 The scholar who has passed through the preceding parts 
 Af fiiA VtnnV. AnH hAAn Aonveraant with the nature and sounds 
 
 V« vfs-v 
 
INTRODUCTION. 
 
 179 
 
 of the letters, must certainly, with the teacher's aid, be car 
 pable of understanding some of the most simple rules res- 
 pecting them: especially as the Exercises in the Appendix 
 now added to the work, will render these rules not only easy 
 but impreaaive. 
 
 We may further observe, that as the rules contained in 
 these chapters, are intended to prepare the scholar for enter- 
 ing on the author's "Abridgement of his English Grammar," 
 this circumstance forms an additional reason for inserting 
 them in the latter part o^he Spelling Book. 
 
 In studying this part of the work, it would be advisable 
 that the learner should in the first instance, pay attention 
 only to the rules and observations expressed in the larger 
 type. This will give him a general idea of the dififereut 
 subjects; which may be afterwards improved, by a careful 
 perusal of the exceptions and remarks contained in the 
 smaller type. Thus initiated, he will be both qualified and 
 disposed to examine the subject with accuracy, when his 
 studies are more advanced, and his knowledge extended 
 
CHAPTER 16. 
 
 Explanatid&s of vowels and consonants, sylla- 
 bles and words.* 
 
 Section 1. 
 Letters, syllables, &:c. 
 
 A letter is the least part of a word. 
 
 The letters of the English alphabet are 
 twenty six. 
 
 Letters are divided into vowels and 
 consonants, (See page 2.) 
 
 A vowel can be sounded by itself. 
 
 A consonant cannot be sounded dis» 
 tinctly by itself. 
 
 A diphthong is two vowels forming 
 but one syllable. 
 
 A triphthong is three vowels forming 
 but one syllable : as, eau in beau. 
 
 * An explanation of the terms contained in this chapter, 
 appears to be necessary, to enable the learner to understand 
 many of the subsequent rules and lesfons. 
 
TKKM8 EXPLAINED. 
 
 181 
 
 A proper diphthong has hoth the vo- 
 wels sounded : as, oi in voice, ou in ounce. 
 
 An improper diphthong has but one 
 of the vo^'els sounded: as, ea in eagle, 
 oa in boat. 
 
 A syllable is so much of a word as can 
 be pronounced at once: as, a, an, ant, 
 bit ter, but ter fly. 
 
 Words are sounds, used as signs of our 
 
 thoughts. 
 
 A word of one syllable, is called a mo- 
 nosyllable; a word of two syllables, a 
 dissyllable; a word of three syllables, a 
 trissyllables ; and a word of four or more 
 syllables, a polysyllable. 
 
 Words of two or more syllables, |^have 
 an accent on one of the syllables. 
 
 Accent signifies that stress of the voice, 
 which is laid on one syllable, to distin- 
 guish it from the rest. Thus, in &p-ple, 
 the accent is on the first syllable; and 
 in a-rlse, it is on the second syllable. 
 The mark placed above the syllable, and 
 which denotes the accent, is also called 
 the accent. 
 
 Q^ 
 
IMAGE EVALUATION 
 TEST TARGET (MT-3) 
 
 
 z 
 
 1.0 
 
 I.I 
 
 11.25 
 
 ■ 50 ™'^" 
 ^ 1^ 
 
 2.5 
 
 12.2 
 
 2.0 
 
 U ill 1.6 
 
 PhotDgKiphic 
 
 Sciences 
 Corporation 
 
 23 WEST MAIN STREET 
 
 WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 
 
 V 71 6) 872-4503 
 

 m 
 
 
 T^ 
 
182 
 
 TERMS JIXPLAINED. 
 
 ' Section 2. 
 Nouns, pmnouHs, &c. 
 
 A noun or substantive, is the name 
 of any thing : as, sun, moon, stars. 
 
 ( ^ ^^-^ 
 
 ' . t * 
 
 ^^Ererywofd that makes sense of itself, is a noun fas, John, 
 Oharies, Londoc: or that takes a, an, or ^Ae, before it; as a 
 tj-ee, an apple, the sun. , ' 
 
 A pronoun is a word used instead of 
 a noun, to avoid repeating the noun: as, 
 I> ^ te, she, they : " Charles is a good boy ; 
 /sc obeys his parents and he speaks the 
 truth," instead of saying, ^^Oharles is a 
 good boy ; Charles obeys his parents, and 
 Charles speaks the truth." 
 
 An adjective is a word that signifies 
 the quality bf a substantive: good, bad, 
 tall, short: a good girl, a tall tree. 
 
 An adjective majy be generally: known, by its!making sense 
 with the word thin^, or any particular noun added to it ; as, 
 a.good thi^g, a bad t^ipg,;iweet apple. -. 
 
 >*■ - . . * ^? * ^ . ' 
 
 ^^ A verb is a word that sigtiifies beirtg, 
 doing, or suffering: as, I am, she v^rites, 
 he is beaten. . 
 
TERMS EXPLAINED. 
 
 183 
 
 name 
 
 as, John, 
 it ; as, a 
 
 lad of 
 n: as, 
 Iboy; 
 s the 
 I is a 
 i^^and 
 
 unifies 
 
 ig sense 
 oit; as, 
 
 )eirtg, 
 rrites;^ 
 
 Any word is a verb, when we can prefix a pronoun to it. 
 Thus, eat, read, play, are verbs : because we can say, I eat, 
 she reads, he plays. A verb is also generally known, by its 
 making sense with the word to before it ; as, to eat, to read> 
 to play. 
 
 The singular number signifies one ob- 
 ject: as, a tree, the house. 
 
 The plural number signifies more than 
 one object t as, trees, houses. 
 
 ■•f 
 
 Section 3. 
 Primitive and derivative words. 
 
 »ttfli*» ''•' 
 
 \nm. 
 
 A primitive Avord is that which cannot 
 be made a more simple word: as, man, 
 good, sincere. 
 
 A derivative word is that which may be 
 made a more simple word: as, manful, good- 
 ness, sincerely. 
 
 A derivative 'W(»rd is sometimes formed of two distinct 
 Words joined' together; as, iuk-horh, bool^-case, tea-table: 
 these are termed compound words. A derivative wrd is 
 also farmed of oij^ word, and ,a syllable or letter joined to 
 it. Vfheu tlie svlhiblc or letter comes first, it is called an 
 initial; w^en it comes at the end, it is called a termination* 
 
184 
 
 TBRMS BXPLAINBD. 
 
 as kind, unkind; please, displease; love, loyely; health 
 healthy. 
 
 INITIALS. 
 
 The initials un, dis, im, in^ «V, signifies the same as not, or 
 vithout, or want of. Thus, unkind, means not kind ; unkind- 
 ness, want of kindness ; dishonest, not honest ; dishonesty, 
 without honesty; impatient, not patient; inattentive, not 
 attentive ; irregular, not regular. 
 
 MU signifies ill, or wrong: as, mismanage, to manage ill; 
 miscall, to name improperly ; misbehaviour, bad behaviour. 
 
 Re sometimes means backwards, and sometimes it means 
 agaia : as, return, to turn, or come back : remind, to bring 
 to mind again ; recall, to call again, to call back. 
 
 TERMINATIONS. 
 
 The terminations er, ar^ or^ show the person who makes 
 or does the thing; as, hat, hatter, one who makes hats; beg, 
 beggar, one who begs: collect, collector, one who collects. 
 
 £r, and est, signifies comparison; as, wise, wiser, wisest: 
 big, bigger, biggest. 
 
 Est, eth, ed, edst, ing, are added to verbs: and some of 
 them give the verbs a different meaning ; as, I love, thou 
 lovest, he loveth, she loved, thou lovest, I am loving. 
 
TERMS EXPLAINED. 
 
 185 
 
 Ly signifies likeness, or in what manner : as, man, manly, 
 like a man ; kind, kindly, in a kind manner. 
 
 Y shows a quality or property, in a great degree : as, 
 health, healthy, haying health ; ^ wood, wopdy, abounding 
 with wood. e'ritrii^i •;*iU xU fcl>iD/«> 
 
 M signifies likeness, or a small degree of resemblance ; as 
 child, childish, like a diild; white, whitish, rather white. 
 
 Full signifies plenty, ox abundance : as; joy, joyful, full of 
 joy. Thi s termination is now always spelled with a single /. 
 
 Less signifies want^ or being witivout: as, qa^e, careless, 
 without C£gr,e : thouglit,. thoughtless, without thought,. . 
 
 r 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 & 
 
 
 Mvn [ilia \sM ■•■"•- 
 
 Tl 
 
 '0*BO 
 
■*»( 
 
 CHAPTER 17. 
 
 The sounds of the letters, with rules to distin- 
 guish them. 
 
 Section 1. 
 
 Sounds of the yowels. 
 
 Each of the vowels has a long and 
 short sound. Some of them have also a 
 middle or a broad sound; and all of them, 
 irregular sounds. We shall consider them 
 under these five divisions. 
 
 First, the long sound of the vowels. 
 
 All the vowels are sounded long in the 
 two following cases. 
 
 1st. In words or syllables that end with 
 a single consonant and silent e i as^ 
 
 cake here 
 name these 
 tamely 
 
 mile 
 
 time 
 
 fineness 
 
 bone 
 rope 
 useful 
 
 fume 
 pure 
 
SOUNDS OF THB LETTERS. 
 
 187 
 
 KZ0BPTI0N8. 
 
 In a: as, are, bade, have; and moet words ending in age: 
 m, cabbage, village, Ao. 
 
 luei as, were. 
 
 In : as, gone, shone, dove, love, glove, shove, done, nonet 
 gome, oome. 
 
 In t: as, give, live; and many words ending in ive and tte: 
 as, narrative, favourite, dec. 
 
 Those words or syllables that oontain the sounds of the 
 middle vowels, are also excepted : as, gape, move, prude, <&c. 
 See pages 189, 190. 
 
 2d. At the end of the monosyllables, 
 the vowel, when sounded, is long: as, he, 
 me, thy, my, so, no. The middle vowels 
 are excepted : as, ha ! do, to, &c. and the 
 broad vowel in la ! 
 
 Second, the short souiid of the vowels. 
 
 All the vowels have a ^ort sound in the 
 two following cases. j^^-n, tf>^H ?^i 
 
 1st. In monosyllables that end with one 
 or more consonants : as. 
 
 Hat led fit r not but 
 
 cast bend dish long curl 
 
188 r 
 
 SOUNDS 0I« THB LETTERS. 
 
 'nUtn^ 
 
 BXCBETIONS. 
 
 In i: words in which Id, nd, ght, follow the yowel: as, 
 
 'j{\f. 
 
 mild 
 child 
 
 In ; as, 
 droll ford 
 
 scroll . . . „ 
 
 rmind : 
 blind ' 
 
 might ,, . . 
 right 
 
 Jfoft Lf sii^lrf host 
 
 port . most 
 
 sport post 
 
 torn 
 
 wom 
 
 •worn 
 
 and all words, iri^hidh 7ef aind « £bll6w the Vowel, as, 
 
 h:Am'ti\ 
 
 boh 
 
 doit 
 
 '.3Y 
 
 *'f^ bold* ^ gold 
 
 ^^ cold ..H)i.?l-^iold ■■"'.' ■• bbl^.-' .'{5^' joltJ-t t'^'' 
 
 Those words which contain the sounds of Hie middle and, 
 broad vowels are also excepted; as, balm, bath, ball, bald, 
 
 Ac. S^e pages ISfli, 1^0, i^l. 
 
 .;x*i t^iii 
 
 lables that end with two cotisotiatiti^' feiM 
 silent f^jt ;a$^ JO ;7,iiiij ^iiidi;H7>onoia i J J-i' 
 
 change hedge mirxpe lodge drudge 
 datice wedge hinge dodg^ grudge 
 
;iOUNDS OP THE LETTBBS. 
 
 09 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 el : as, 
 
 lu a: as, all words in which st, ng, or fA,are placed before 
 the silent e : as, 
 
 haste 
 
 paste 
 
 In : as force 
 
 change 
 strange 
 forge 
 
 bathe 
 
 lathe 
 
 bore 
 
 torn 
 WOftl 
 
 i i;iwora 
 
 r r. 
 
 as. 
 
 I4dl4 and, 
 >all, bald, 
 
 I 1 ) • > 
 
 ii" a,M 
 
 .,;>! 
 
 irudge 
 jrudge 
 
 These rules for determining when the vowel is long or short, 
 seem to be all that will probably be useful to young learners. 
 Other rules have, however, been advanced by grammarians, 
 namely : the vowel is long, when it ends a syllable ; or when 
 the accent rests on the vowel ; it is short, when a consonant 
 ends the syllable ; or when the accent rests on the consonant. 
 But how is the child to know, when a vowel or a consonant 
 ends the syllable ; or when the accent rests on the vowel or, 
 the consonant ? To tell him, that the vowel ends the syllable, 
 and the accent rests on it, when the vowel is long, <fec., would 
 be to argue in a circle, and would not convey to him any sa- 
 tisfactory information. 
 
 Third, the middle sounds of the vowels, 
 
 A has its middle sound in the following 
 cases. 
 
 1st. When it comes before r in mono- 
 syllables : as, bar^ carp, mark, start. ^ ji;; 
 
190 
 
 SOUNDS OF THE LBTrER8» 
 
 But if r be doubled, to form another sj'llable, the a is short; 
 as, carry, marry, tarry. 
 
 2d. When it is followed by Im : as calm, 
 palm, psalm, except qualm. 
 
 3d. When it is followed by If, Ire, or by 
 th sharp: as, calf, half, salve; bath, lath, 
 path : except hath, wrath. 
 
 has its middle sound, in the following 
 words: prove, move, do, ado, lose, and 
 their comiwunds ; and in who, whom, womb, 
 tomb, Rome, poltroon, ponton, <\c. 
 
 U has its middle sound in the following 
 words. 
 
 In bull, pull, full; and in all their com- 
 pounds: as, bullock, fulfil, delightful, c>c. 
 
 In puss, push, bush, pullet, bushel, pul- 
 pit, bullion, butcher, cushion, cuckoo, pud- 
 ding, sugar, huzza. 
 
 Fourth, the broad sound of a, as in at/. 
 
 A has its broa4,^und in the following 
 cases. 
 
 - Int When it is followed by //: as, all, 
 call, fall| tall, small: except mall, shall. 
 
aOUNDS OP THB LBTTBRSi 
 
 191 
 
 2(1. When it is followed ^y one / and 
 another consonant: as, salt, bald, false, 
 
 Tf tlie / is followed by p, 6,/, or v, the a is not broad : as, 
 alpa, ciilf, Hulve, <feo. 
 
 3d. When it follows w and precedes r as, 
 war, wart, swarm. 
 
 4th. In words derived from monosyllables 
 ending in //: as, albeit, almost, also. 
 
 When I ends one syllable, and begins the next, the a is not 
 broad ; as, alley, valley, tally. 
 
 FiFTiT. Irregular sounds of the vowels, de- 
 viating from their sounds in the scale iat 
 page T). 
 
 :.>^) 
 
 A. 
 
 A sounds like e short, in the following 
 words: any, many, Thames, says, said. 
 
 A sounds like i short, in many words 
 ending in ape, when the accent is not on 
 it : as, cabbage, village, courage. 
 
 E. 
 
 j& sounds like a long in these words: 
 there,, where, exQ^ 
 
 m'ii 
 
192 
 
 SOUNDS OP THB LETTERS. 
 
 ^sounds like middle «, in these words: 
 clerk, clerkship, serjeant. 
 
 E sounds like i short, in these words: 
 yes, pretty, England ; and in many final 
 unaccented syllables : as, faces, praises, li- 
 nen, duel. 
 
 E sounds like short u, in her : and in 
 the unaccented termination en as, writer, 
 reader, suffer, garter. 
 
 / sounds like e long, in many words de- 
 rived from foreign languages : as. 
 
 antique 
 
 Brazil 
 
 caprice 
 
 chagrin 
 
 quarantine 
 
 routine 
 
 fatigue 
 
 intrigue 
 
 invalid 
 
 machine 
 
 magazme 
 
 marine 
 
 poFice 
 
 profile 
 
 recitative 
 
 / sounds like u short, when it comes 
 before r, followed by another consonant; 
 as, bird, dirt, thirst. . 
 
 /sounds ]ik« c short, in the following words; which are 
 exceptions to the preceding rule; 
 
 birth gird girt skirt 
 
 finn girl mirth whirl 
 
ROUNDS OP TUB tBTTBBS. 
 
 0. 
 
 m 
 
 generally sounds like a broad, when 
 it is followed by r: as, 
 
 morn horn adorn for 
 
 scorn thorn exhort formerly 
 
 sounds like short w, in many words : 
 as. 
 
 monk 
 
 some 
 
 among 
 
 comfort 
 
 month 
 
 ton 
 
 brother 
 
 covenant 
 
 shove 
 
 worm 
 
 colour 
 
 Somerset 
 
 u 
 
 U sounds like short e, in these words : 
 bury, burial, burier. 
 
 It sounds like short ^, in these words : 
 busy, business, busybody. 
 
 (J sounds like middle o in these words: 
 
 crude rule brute prune spruce 
 rude Ruth prude truth truce 
 
 Section 2. 
 General sounds of the principal diphthongs. 
 
 01, OU, &C, u. u 
 
 Oi and ot/ have both the vowels sounded : 
 as, boil, toil, soil; boy, coj, toy.— The^ 
 
SOUNDS OF THiS LETTERS^. 
 
 sound of these diphthongs, is that of broad 
 a and long e^ 
 
 Ou and ow have both the vowels sound- 
 ed: as, mouse, spout, trout: cow, vow, 
 town, — Th- sound of these diphthongs, is 
 that of broad a and middle u. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Ou h sometimes sounded like short u ; as, rough, touch, 
 courage. 
 
 Sometimes like mir'.I!« o ; as group, soup, surtout 
 Sometimes like o luog ; as, court, mould, shoulder. 
 Ow is sometimes aounied like o long; as, blow, crow, 
 snow. 
 
 AI, EI, &C. 
 
 Ai, ay, ei, and ey are sounded like a 
 in fate: ^Sy 
 
 pail 
 sail 
 tail 
 
 say 
 way 
 
 vein 
 
 eight 
 
 prey 
 they 
 
 weight obey 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Ai is sometimes sounded like a short \ as, plaid, raillery. 
 Sometimei like e short; as, said, again, against. 
 Sometimes like i short, as when it is .n a syllable not ac- 
 
 ef>nf.AH • DA- fminfciin /tnnfnvn Aiinf-ain 
 
 7 — T — — —— ••»-5-a.5j '-■T.«l,'t;wii*, '.-tai vsiits. 
 
 Ei sometimes sounds like long « : as, either, neither, ceil- 
 iog, deceit) reoeiTe» 
 
 ■.V' 
 
SOUNDS OF THE LETTERS. 
 
 195 
 
 Sometimes like long i : as, height, sleight. 
 Sometimes like short i: as when it is not ^cented, as fo- 
 reign, forfeit, sm'feit. 
 
 Ey, when unaccented, sounds like long e, as alley, barley, 
 Talley. 
 
 EA, EE, IE, 
 
 Ea, ee, and ie have the long sound of e : 
 
 as, 
 
 bean beer chief 
 
 cream feet grief 
 
 please steel believe 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Ea is frequently sounded like short e, as bread, dead, 
 spread. 
 
 Sometimes like middle a, as hard, hearth, hearken. 
 Ee is sounded like short i, in the word breeches. 
 Ie is sometimes sounded like long i, as die, lie, pie. 
 
 OA, and OE, 
 
 Oa and oe have the long sound of o: 
 as, boat, coat, loaf, doe, foe, toe. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Oe rounds like middle o, in shoe, and canoe, and like short 
 «, in does. 
 
 EU, &C., 
 
 -t-rrt, n.f^, SXllK.*. f*o liavu LiiC lUilg SUUUU OI Ml 
 
 as, feud, deuce; dew, new, few; clue blue, 
 hue. 
 
196 
 
 SOUNDS OF THE I^ETTERS. 
 
 'i 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Ew Is sounded like long o, in the word sew. 
 
 Ew, when preceded by r, sounds like middle o as brew, 
 crew, drew. 
 
 Ucf is sometimes sounded like short c, as guess, guesser, 
 guest. 
 
 After r, it has the sound of toiddle o, as rue true, imbrua. 
 
 AU, AW. 
 
 All and aw are sounded like abroad; 
 as, Paul, taught, caught; law, bawl, 
 cawl. 
 
 BXOEPTIONS. 
 
 w^tt, when- followed by n and another eonsooant, has the 
 sound of middle a, as aunt, haunt, launch. 
 
 In laugh and draught, it also sounds like middle «. 
 
 In cauliflower, laurel, and laudanum it sounds like short o. 
 And in guage, like long a. 
 
 00. 
 
 Oo has the sound of middle o: as, food, 
 soon, moon. 
 
 SXOfiPTIONa. 
 
 Oo, before k, sounds like middle «, as book, flook, look, in 
 the following words ;* - 
 
 foot gooS wool withstood 
 
 . hood wood stood understood 
 
 * See the note at Pago 28. ^ 
 
suunbs of thb letters. if7 
 
 Section 3. 
 Sounds of the consonants. 
 
 C. 
 
 C is sounded hard, like k, before a, o, 
 and u ; as, card, cord, curd. 
 
 C is sounded soft, like s, before e, e, and 
 y; as, cedar, city, Cyprus. 
 
 C sounds like z. in suffice, discern, sac- 
 rilice. 
 
 C^has the sounds oi sh^ in ocean, special, 
 delicious, &c. 
 
 !>• 
 
 D frequently sounds like t, in the abbre- 
 viated termination ed: as, stuflFed, rasped, 
 cracked, hissed, touched, faced, mixed; 
 pronounced, stuft, raspt, crackt, &c. 
 
 D sounds like >, in soldier, grandeur, 
 verdure, education. 
 
 '' .0. ' 
 
 G is sounded hard before a, o, u^ I, and 
 r I as, game, gone, gull, glory, grandeur. 
 
1198 
 
 SDUWDS OF THE LETTERS. 
 
 G is sounded soft before r, /, and ;/; as, 
 g-elly, gipsy, elegy ; except in get, giddy, 
 foggy; and some others. 
 
 Q has the sound of k^ and is always ac- 
 companied by //,, which generally sounds 
 Y\\iQ w\ as, quaci;^,, gu^lity. 
 
 s. 
 
 i -S'^has a sharp hissing sound at the begin- 
 ing of words; as so, sell, sun. 
 
 It has the sharp sound after, f, k, p^ t\ 
 as muffs, socks, lips, mats. 
 
 S has a flat buzzing sound like z, after 
 hy d^ g, hard^ or v : as, ribs, heads, rags, 
 doves. 
 
 It is pronouncied like z^ in as^ his, wasj 
 these, those] and in all plurals when the 
 singulars end in a vowel; as, commas, shoes 
 ways, news. 
 
 S sometimes sounds like sh : as, sure, 
 sugar, expulsion, dimension, reversion. 
 ..:ir>S»iias aiso tiie sound Qi zhi as 
 evasidn, conftision. , 
 
 1 
 
SOUNDS OF THE XETTERS. 
 
 199 
 
 T. 
 
 ■JfVf*. 
 
 7' has three sounds; 1st. that which is, 
 heard in tatter, tittle: 2d. the sound oi tfik^\ 
 as, nature, fortune, virtue ; 3d. the sound 
 of i'A: as nation, formation. 
 
 X. 
 
 ■ .a 
 
 
 X has a sharp sound like ks, when it 
 ends a syllable with the accent on it : as^ [ 
 exercise, excellence. 
 
 It is also sounded sharp wh^n the accent 
 is on the next syllable beginning with a 
 consonant; as, excuse, expense. 
 
 X has its flat sound like gz, when the 
 accent is not on it, and the fbllawing ac- 
 cented syllable begins with a vowel;' as^. 
 exert, exist, example. 
 
 A' at the beginning of words, has the 
 sound of ^:( as Xerxes. Xenophon. . -...,, 
 
 ■ ■ „ ■ . ,; A- . . :lnBiiq 
 
 ■^ •■■ I ,-.*■■. . •-***. - \ * . 
 
 y, as a consonant^ has 'ways the saifte 
 When it follows a consonant, aiiidjeads a- 
 
m._ ' (J 
 
 200 
 
 SOUNDS OP THB LBTTBRS. 
 
 word or syllable, it is pronounced like i 
 long, if the accent is on it; as, deny; but 
 like e long, if the accent is not on it: as, 
 folly. 
 
 CH. 
 
 CH has three sounds. 
 
 The first like tch : as, child, chair, rich. 
 
 The second like sh, after / orn : as, filch, 
 bench, and in words from the French ; as, 
 chaise, machine. 
 
 "The third like k: as, echo, scholar, sto- 
 mach. 
 
 b:;i{* 
 
 OH. 
 
 - G^fl'is frequently pronounced like/: as, 
 laugh, cough, enough. 
 
 ;s>w 
 
 PH. 
 
 PH is generally pronounced like / : as, 
 phantom, physic, philosophy. 
 
 It sounds like v, in nephew and Stephen. 
 The remaining consonants have the 
 
 tary soarids, at page 6. 
 
^r"*,?» 
 
 CHAPTER 18. 
 The silent letters, with rules denoting them. 
 
 Sbction 1. / 
 
 Silent vowels. 
 E. 
 
 When the verbal termination ed, is not 
 preceded by d or t, the e is almost univer- 
 sally silent : as loved, filled, barred, bribed, 
 saved, nailed : which are pronounced as if 
 written, lov'd, fiU'd, barr'd, &c. 
 
 When rf or ^ precedes ed, the e is fully 
 pronounced: as added, divided, command- 
 ed; waited, diverted, translated. 
 
 Adjectives ending in ed retain the sound of e: as, learned, 
 blessed, aged, naked, wicked, scabbed, crooked, forked, 
 wretched, crabbed, ragged, rugged. 
 
 When a syllable is added to words which drop the e, the 
 ed in those words, has its full and distinct sound: as, reser- 
 ved, reservedly, reservedness ; feigned, feignedly : confused 
 eonfusedlv. 
 
 In words ending in le preceded by a consonant, tll^ t i» 
 not sounded ; as, ancle, candle, probable. 
 
202 
 
 SILBNT LBTTRRS. 
 
 E before /, in a final unaccented syllable, 
 is silent in the following words : 
 
 ravel 
 shekel 
 snivel 
 drivel 
 
 shrivel 
 swivel 
 shovel 
 grovel 
 
 hazel 
 navel 
 weasel 
 
 In all other words the e before the /, must be distinclj 
 ■ounded. 
 
 JEJ before n^ in a final unaccented sylla- 
 ble, and not preceded by ?, m, w, or r, is 
 silent ; as loosen, hearken, harden, heaven. 
 
 t\ i 
 
 Aspen 
 
 chicken , 
 
 hypbea 
 
 jerkin 
 
 'r'jt fi) 
 
 IIXCEPTIONS. 
 
 jiitohen 
 leaven , 
 marten 
 mitten 
 
 ipfittm 
 
 sloven 
 
 i 
 
 sudden 
 ticken 
 
 £ is silent at the end of a word or syllable, in which there 
 is another vowel ; as, base, basely ; tame, lameness ; sedate, 
 repose, refuse. 
 
 The final e silent, serves to lengthen the sopud of the pre- 
 ceding vowel : as, can, cane : not, note ; past, paste ; and to 
 0oft^n the sound of c and g ; as, lac, lape ; rug, rage ; slog 
 singe. 
 
 '' 1 silent. ' 
 
 •!'VO«t1 
 
 /is silent, in the words, evil, devil, cou- 
 sin, business : j^nd generally in the termi- 
 
6 1 LENT LBTTBES^ 
 
 t09 
 
 nations tion^ tientj &c. pronounced shiiny 
 shenty &c. See page 104. 
 
 o 
 
 0, in the termiilation on, after a conso- 
 nant, is generally silent : as, 
 
 Beacon pardon button 
 crimson person weapon 
 
 In on, preceded by/, m, n, or r, the o ie sounded : as, rne- 
 lou, sermon, cannon, baron. 
 
 UE. 
 
 The diphthong W6 preceded %Y g, of y, 
 at the end of w6rds, is silent : as, 
 
 Rfigue 
 plague 
 
 colleague 
 intrigue 
 
 catalogue 
 dialogue 
 
 Cinque 
 pique 
 
 mosque 
 oblique 
 
 > opaque 
 grotesque 
 
 Section &. ? 
 Silent consonants. 
 
 When b follows m, in the same syllable, 
 it is silent: as, numb, benumb, hecatomb, 
 
 B is also- silent in the words debt, doubt, subtle,; and 
 their compounds, debtor, doubtful, doubtless, <fec 
 
 C. 
 
 i! twaoe^nc^A nxr o onn •rnllrkxwrirl Kir o r\v i* 
 
 is silent: as scene, sceni, scej)tre, science. 
 
204 
 
 SILENT LETTERS. 
 
 
 C is silent in omf, czarine, musole. 
 
 sel. 
 
 D is silent in handsome, handsel ground- 
 
 G. 
 
 Gy before n, in the same syllable, is si- 
 lent : as, gnat, gnaw, design, foreign. 
 
 Grrt, at the end of an accented ay liable, gives the preceding 
 , Towel a long sound : as, condign, oppuga 
 
 Gh is generally silent at the end of a 
 word or syllable or when followed by t: as, 
 Although brightly delightful^ 
 
 Gh lengthens the preceding vowel. 
 
 H. 
 
 // is silent at the beginning of the fol- 
 lowing words, and their derivatives : but in 
 every other word it is sounded. 
 
 Heir hour honour 
 herb honest hostler 
 
 humble 
 humour 
 
 H is always silent after r : as, rhubarb, rhetoric, rheuma- 
 tism. 
 
 — — . — J |,. ^,^,»j.„^,a .^j •_- TVTT\,-i., la txi.tr txjs aii.'^^^uLM . aoy an I vx* i 
 
 Hannah, hallelujah, Messiah. 
 
SILBNT LETTERS. 
 
 205 
 
 ^ is always silent before w, in the same 
 syllable : as, knit, knuckle, knowledge. 
 
 Ck, at the end of words and syllables, sounds like k only ; 
 and the preceding yowel is short: as, stock, packet, pocket. 
 
 Z, between a and k in the same syllable, 
 is silent : as, balk, chalk, stalk. 
 
 Ly between a and m in the same syllable, 
 is also^itent: as, alms, balm, psalm. '^ 
 
 ■^•^fiA 
 
 Lv 
 
 L is also' silent in the following words : calf, fiiilve, could, 
 would, tihould, falcon, chaldron, salmon, malmsey. ..« 
 
 iV, preceded by m is silent when it ends 
 a syllable, as: ■> 
 
 Hymn coluthn condemn 
 . ....soleipn autumn contemn^ 
 
 p. 
 
 P, between m and Y in the middle of 
 words, or in a final syllable, is sjleut: as, 
 empty, redemption ; attempt, contempt, ex- 
 empt. 
 
 I* is also silent in psalm, psalmist, psalter, pshaw, reeeipt, 
 raspberry, sempstress. 
 
 S2 
 
206 
 
 SILENT LBTTEnS. 
 
 "*i A 
 
 S is silent in isle^ island^ aisle, viscount. 
 
 T. 
 
 T is silent, when preceded by s, and fol- 
 lowed by the abbreviated terminations en 
 and/e: as, ' 
 
 .'»Hl 
 
 Hasten 
 
 , /• 
 
 thistle 
 
 listen .Jii .(ifij epistle 
 moisten . apostle 
 
 T'lB also silent in the foUowiog words : 
 
 castle 
 br' 8 le 
 bustle 
 
 Often 
 th soften 
 currant 
 
 Christnlfts 
 
 cheshut 
 
 hostler 
 
 W. 
 
 mortgage 
 
 bankruptcy 
 
 mistletoe 
 
 TT IS always silent before r: as, wren, 
 wrestle, wrinkle. 
 
 >^» It i^ also silent before h followed bjt lon^ 
 or middle o: as, whole, who, whose. 
 
CHAPTER 19. 
 
 Rules for spelling. 
 
 Section 1. 
 
 Rules for the division of syllables. 
 
 Rule i. — A single consonant between two 
 vowels, must be joined to the latter syllable : 
 as, be have, de sire, re main ; pa per, du ty, 
 ci ty ; a cid, ma gic, ta cit ; a wake, hea vy, 
 sea son ; ge ne rat, mi se ry, ca pa ci ty. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 The letter x is always jpined to the first syUahle : as, ex- 
 alt, ex ist, lux u ry.* 
 
 Some derivative words are also exceptions : as up on, un- 
 even, dis use, pri son er, Ac. • 
 
 Rule ii. — Two consonants, proper to begin 
 a syllablet, must not be separated, if the pre- 
 ceding vowel is long : as, a ble, de clare, 
 blige, nee die. 
 
 If the preceding syllable is short, the con- 
 sonants must be separated : as, cus tard, pub- 
 lic, gos ling. 
 
 * As to or y, at the end of a syUable, is a vowel, it forms 
 no exception to the first rule : as, tow el, roy al. 
 
 may be seen in the section of syllables at pages 11,12. 
 
 'j-a-x^l 
 
203 
 
 RULES FOR SPELLING. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 A ie^ words in which the consonants are p/ece Jed by a 
 short, roust be excepted : as, a fraid, a gree, pa trol, pi tri. 
 rao ny, pro ba ble, mi ra de, <fec. 
 
 Rule hi.-— If the two consonants cannot 
 begin a syllable, they, must be separated ; as, 
 up per,' bios som, cot tage ; un der, chito ney, 
 mon key. 
 
 Rule IV- — ^When three consonants meet in 
 the middle of a word, they are not to be se- 
 parated, if they can begin a syllable, and the 
 preceding vowel is long: as, de stroy, re- 
 strain, de scribe. 
 
 If the preceding syllable is short, the con- 
 sonants must be separated : as dis creet, dis- 
 tract, dis train. 
 
 • 
 
 RuME V. — When three or four consonants, 
 not proper to begin a syllable, meet between 
 two vowels, such of them as can begin a syl- 
 lable belong to the latter, the rest to the for- 
 . mer syllable : as, ap ply, im prove, in struct, 
 but cher, slaugh ter, hand some ; trans gress, 
 post cript, parch ment. 
 
 Rule vi. — Two consonants which form but 
 one sound, are never separated : as, c cho, fa- 
 txxci, |jiw ^ncL, iiii uiiur, ui sijop. rney are 
 to be considered as a single letter. 
 
RULES FOR SPELLING. 
 
 209 
 
 Rule vii. — Two vowels, not being a diph- 
 thong, must be separated into syllables: as, 
 po et, vi al, fu el, so ei e ty. 
 
 A diphthong immediately preceding a vow- 
 el is to be separated from it : as roy al, pow- 
 er, jew el. 
 
 All the preceding rules refer to primitive words, and are 
 to be considered as operating upon them only. Thus, but- 
 cher, slaugh ter, laugh ter, pro phet, are properly divided, 
 as primitives ; whilst, scorch es, poach er, laugh er, pri son- 
 er, have a regular division, as derivatives. 
 
 Rule viii. — ^In derivative words, the addi- 
 tional syllables are separated: as sweet er, 
 sweet est, sweet ly; learn ed, learn eth, 
 learn ing ; dis like, mis lead, un even ; call ed, 
 roll er, dress ing ; gold en, bolt ed; be liev er, 
 pleas ing. 
 
 EXCEFriONS. 
 
 When the derivative word doubles the single letter of the 
 primitive, one of those letters is joined to the termination; 
 as, beg, beg gar; fat, fat ter; bid, bid ding. 
 
 When the additional syllable is preceded by c or g- soft, 
 the c or g is added to that syllable ; as, of fen ces, cot ta ges 
 pro noun cer, in dul ging ; ra cer, fa cing, spi ced, wa ger, 
 ^^ giog, pla ced, ran ger, chan ging, chan ged. 
 
 Who the preceding single vowel is long, the consonant, 
 if single, 13 joined to the termination, as ba ker, ba king, ho- 
 piog, bro ken, po ker, bo uy, wri ter, sla vish, mu sed, sa- 
 ved. 
 

 pi 'i J 
 
 ! ' 
 1 
 
 t 
 
 ' 
 
 'i 
 
 ' 
 
 t '♦ 
 
 .1 
 
 210 
 
 Rtxad POA SPBLLIIfO. 
 
 The termination y is not to be placed alone, as saa dy, 
 gras sy, dir ty, dus ty, mos sy, fro3 ty, hea dy, woo dy, ex. 
 cept dough y, snow y, string y, and a few other words. But 
 even in these exceptions, it would be proper to avoid begin- 
 iug a Hue with the termination y. 
 
 Rule ix. — Compound words must be divi- 
 ded by the simple words which form them : as, 
 black bird, sea horse, hot house, York shire. 
 
 m 
 
 The preceding rules are conformable to the best authori- 
 ties for the division of syllables. They are defiuite, and 
 easily applied to every word. Some writers, however, have 
 deviated from the first rule, with a view to assist pronunci- 
 ation. But the principle of associating letters according to 
 the pronunciation may, doubtless, be too far extended. Of 
 this opinion are Nares, Walker, and many otlier writers. 
 Such a division, besides being contrary to long established 
 practice, would give to a great number of words a most un- 
 couth and perplexing appeal*anee. This may be seen in a 
 few instances, cit y, ver y, mon ey, ac cute, ac id, mag ic, 
 ar ise, av oid, am ong, heav y, troub le, cod le, par as ol, 
 aq uat ic, ap ol o gy, ac ad em y. 
 
 The first rule, as it stands in this section, presents tbe 
 words in neat and regrlar divisions, and is so far from being 
 affected by an ever varyfng pronunciation, that it ha? some 
 tendency to check that variation. 
 
I ll 
 
 fiUJ^BS FOR ftPBLIilNO. 
 
 211 
 
 as saa dy, 
 '"oo dy, ex. 
 ords. But 
 roid begin- 
 
 be divi- 
 em: as, 
 I'k shire. 
 
 st author!' 
 fiuite, and 
 ever, have 
 ; pronunci- 
 cording to 
 •nded. Of 
 sr writers. 
 sstablisUed 
 a most un- 
 ) seen In a 
 d, mag ic, 
 par as ol, 
 
 esents the 
 Tom being 
 . ha? some 
 
 Rule x. — The letters, or terminations, ion, 
 t'loiu tial, tious, scious, science, &c., are to be 
 divided into two syllables : as, pil li on, ac- 
 ti on, par ti al, can ti ous, pre ci ons, con sci- 
 ence. 
 
 The author's reasons in support of iht tf:n\h rule, ftr^ the 
 
 following. 
 
 1. The rapid pronunciation of two syllables, so as to re- 
 Eemble the sound of one syllable, does not, in fact, make them 
 one. The words, business, colonel, victuals, ashanied, be- 
 lieved, &c., are pronounced as two syllables though they 
 are really three. 
 
 2. The divisions adopted renders the gradations in spell- 
 ing a word, more simple, and much easier to the learner, 
 than combining the letters. If spelling is made practicable 
 and easy to children, by dividing words into syllables, it 
 follows, that the more this division can be conveniently ex- 
 tended, the better it is calculated to answer the end. 
 
 8. The old plan of dividing these letters, or terniinaLlions, 
 is uniform and invariable, the new plan of dividing them, 
 is liable to numerous exceptions and frequent variations. 
 
 4. Combining and separating syllables accordifig to the 
 pronunciation, would present still more irregular and un- 
 couth appearances, than the associations of letters, vowels 
 and consonants to suit the pronunciation. The following are 
 a few specimens, on ion, o cean, ven geanee. Poo iard, court- 
 ier, scutch eon, bril liaut ly, per fid ious ly, puuc til io, jus- 
 ti ciar y. 
 
212 
 
 RULES -FOR SPELLING. 
 
 6. If the combinations of letters pronounced as one syl. 
 lable, were to have a correspondent arrangement, we should 
 have an extremely difficult, as well as an extremely irregu- 
 lar mode of dividing our words into syllables. How would 
 the advocates for dividing according to the pronunciation, 
 divide the words, business, colonel, victuals, sevennight, 
 double, triple, moved, stufifed, devoured, abused, and many 
 others of a similar nature? A rule which, at best, is so 
 inconvenient, and which, in numerous instances cannot be 
 reduced to practice, certiunly does not merit adoption. 
 
 6. The best authorities, as well as a great majority of them 
 may be adduced in support of this division. Walker, in the 
 last edition of his dictionary, says, "Though tixm and sion 
 are really pronoiinced in one syllable, they are by almost all 
 our Orthoepists, divided into two, and consequently, nation, 
 pronunciation, occasion, evasion, <&;c.{coutain the same number 
 of syllables as, natio, pronunciato, occasio, evasio, in Latin." 
 
 On the whole, we think that the old plan, whilst it pos- 
 sesses so much superiority, is liable to no inconvenience' 
 Even pronunciation is as readily acquired by it, as by the 
 new plan. The learner cannot know that Hon sounds like 
 shun, tial like shal, science like shense, &c. till his teacher di* 
 rects him to this pronunciation, and the same direction will 
 teach that ti on, ti al, sci ence, Ac. have the same sounds. 
 Much therefore is lost, and nothing gained by the new divi- 
 sion. 
 
 ■ ria e»i' 
 
 .'{ 
 
as one syl. 
 b, we should 
 aely irregu- 
 How would 
 onunciation, 
 
 sevennight, 
 i, and many 
 b best, is BO 
 IS cannot be 
 option. 
 
 rity of them 
 alker, in the 
 Ion and sion 
 >y almost all 
 Qtly, nation, 
 ame number 
 0, in Latin." 
 
 hilst itpoB- 
 Bonvenieace. 
 t, as by the 
 sounds like 
 a teacher di- 
 rection will 
 ime sounds, 
 he new divi- 
 
 rules for spelling. 
 Section 2. 
 
 213 
 
 Rules respecting the double consonants, in 
 primitive words. 
 
 Rule i. — ^Monosyllables ending with/, I or, 
 ,5 preceded by a single vowel, double the final 
 consonant: as, muff, hill, puss. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 If aa has 
 
 of is gas 
 
 yes 
 
 this 
 
 Ills 
 wag 
 
 us 
 thus 
 
 Rule ii. — ^Monosyllables ending with any 
 consonant but/, I, or s, preceded by a single 
 vowel, never double the final consonant : as, 
 fib, mud, rug, sun, cur, nut. 
 
 ^SCCEPTIONS. 
 
 vbtj odd inn 
 
 idd -egg bunn 
 
 err butt 
 purr buzz 
 
 Rule hi.— A consonant preceded by a diph- 
 thong, or a long vowel, is never doubled: as, 
 
 ready couple laurel wafer 
 
 steady double flourish poker 
 
 Rule iv. — Primitive words of more than 
 one syllable, never end with double / : as, 
 
 Dial flannel gambol annul 
 
 frugal pupil symbol mogul 
 
 T 
 
214 RULES FOR SPELLING. 
 
 Rule v. — ^V, x, and k, are never doubled.* 
 
 P is used before k, when a single vowel precedes, as^ back, 
 neck, pocket, knuckle. At the end of words of two or more 
 syllables, the k is omitted by most writers, as mimic, public 
 almanac. 
 
 Rule vi. — ^In dissyllables the consonant is 
 doubled, when it is preceded by a short vowel, 
 and followed by the termination le : as bubble, 
 saddle, apple, kettle. 
 
 Codle, frizle, treble, triple, are frequently given as excep- 
 tions, but it would be better, if they were comprehended in 
 the rule. 
 
 Rule vii. — ^In dissyllables ending in y, or 
 ey, the preceding consonant is always doubled, 
 when it follows a short vowel : as folly, sorry, 
 valley. 
 
 EXOIPnONS. 
 
 In y, body 
 study 
 lily 
 
 In ey, honey 
 
 any 
 many 
 cony 
 money 
 
 copy 
 very 
 bury 
 
 busy 
 
 city 
 
 pity 
 
 Rule viii. — ^In words ending with er, et, 
 ow, the preceding consonant is always 
 doubled, when it follows a short vowel : as, 
 flatter, linnet, tallow. 
 
 * The third and fifth rulei apply also to derivative wordi. 
 
Dubled.* 
 
 s, asj back, 
 vo or more 
 aic, public, 
 
 onant is 
 b vowel, 
 bubble, 
 
 i as excep- 
 bended in 
 
 m y, or 
 oubled, 
 % sorry, 
 
 busy 
 
 city 
 
 pity 
 
 t er, et, 
 
 always 
 
 i^el: as, 
 
 RULES FOR SPELLING. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 215 
 
 ye wordi. 
 
 In er, primer, proper, cboler, soder, lepper, consider. 
 
 In et, claret closet comet 
 
 cadet planet spinet 
 
 tenet valet alphabet 
 
 In ow, shadow, widow. 
 
 Rule ix. — In words ending with ic, id, it, 
 ish, ity, the preceding consonant is never 
 doubled : as frolic, solid, habit, astonish qua- 
 lity. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 In ic, attic, traffic, tyrannic. 
 
 In id, horrid, torrid, pallid, flaccid. 
 
 In it, rabbit, summit, commit. 
 
 In ish, skittish, embellish. 
 
 In ity, necessity. 
 
 Rule x. — In words beginning with ac, af, 
 ef, of, the consonant, followed by a vowel, is 
 always doubled ; as accord, afford, effect, of- 
 fice. 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 In ac, accute, acumen, acid, academy, acanthus, acerbity. 
 In af, afore, afar. 
 
 Rule xi. — In words beginning with am, 
 
 cat. el. en. mod. nar. the con son ant is never 
 
 .-,-_. -^-, - - -- ^ j^- — _. — -.- 
 
 doubled ; as, amend, catalogue, elegant, epi- 
 taph, modest, paradise. 
 
216 
 
 RULES FOR SPELLING. 
 
 nm 
 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 In am, ammoniao, ammuDition. 
 
 In cat, cattle. 
 
 In el, ellipsis. 
 
 la par, parry, parrot, parricide. 
 
 Further rules for doubling consonants founded on other 
 initials and terminations, might be inserted, but as they ex- 
 tend to only a few words, or have many exceptions, they arg 
 omitted. Those which are mentioned, are explicit and use- 
 ful, adapted to the limits of this work, and calculated to 
 lead the scholar lo further reflections on the subject. 
 
 Sectiox 3. 
 Eules respecting derivative words* 
 
 The orthography of the English language would be sim- 
 plified and improved, if the rules for spelliug derivative 
 words, were uniformly observed. Dr. Johnson seems to have 
 been sensible of this, though he has not paid all the attention 
 to it that is desirable. Many of the inconsistencies, or rather 
 contradictions, with respect to derivative words, that occur 
 in his excellent dictionary, arose, probably, from mere inad* 
 vertenoe in himself or his printer. Thus, irreconcilable, im- 
 movable, immovably, are spelled according to the general 
 rule, (Rule2,) whilst reconcii cable, moveable, and moveably, 
 
nULES FOR SPELLFNQ. 
 
 21T 
 
 nre contrary to it. Fertiletiess and chnstdy, conform to tlie 
 general rule ; (Rule 3 ;) fertility, and chasteness, deviate from 
 it. Sliness is according to the general rule; (Rule 4;) slyly is 
 contrary to it. Fearlessness, and needlessnoss are agreeable 
 to the general rule; (6;) needlessly and fearlessly, vary 
 from it. — In stating the following rules for spelling deriva. 
 tive words, we have not followed these irregularities. No 
 exceptions arc remarked, but those which are supported by 
 long and established custom, or which, from the nature aud 
 construction of the language, are absolutely necessary. 
 
 KuLE I. — The plural number of nouns is 
 formed by adding s to the singular : as, pea, 
 peas, ; table, tables ; window, windows ; muff* 
 muffs ; face, faces.* 
 
 EXOKPTIONSi 
 
 ExcEP. 1. Nouns ending in x, ss, sh, and ch soft, form tBo- 
 plural number, by tbe addition of es: as, 
 
 Tax 
 ass 
 
 taxes 
 asses 
 
 fish 
 watch 
 
 fishes 
 watches 
 
 • In words in which e mute is preceded by the letter e, g, 
 
 gular; as lace, laces; cage, cages; praise, praises; prize,, 
 prizes. 
 
218 
 
 RULES FOR SPELLING. 
 
 ExcEP. 2. Nouns ending in o form the plural, by adding 
 
 es: as. 
 
 Cargo 
 
 cargoes 
 
 buffalo 
 
 buffaloes 
 
 echo 
 
 , echoes 
 
 potato 
 
 potatoes 
 
 hero 
 
 heroes 
 
 volcano 
 
 volcanoes 
 
 Those words in which i precedes o, follow the general 
 rule, by adding s only, to form the plural : as, nuncio, nun- 
 cios ; punctilio, punctilios ; seraglio, seraglios. 
 
 ExCEP. 8. Nouns ending in y, preceded by a consonant 
 form the plural, by changing y into ies : as, 
 
 Fly flies lady ladies 
 
 city cities berry berries 
 
 Nouns ending in y, preceded by a vowel, follow the gene- 
 ral rule, by adding s only, to form the plural : as, 
 
 Boy boys delay delays 
 
 key ' keys attorney attorneys 
 
 HxcEP. 4. — The following nouns ending in /, or fe, form 
 the plural number by changing those terminations into ves : 
 
 Calf 
 
 calves 
 
 self 
 
 selves 
 
 
 elf 
 
 elves 
 
 sheaf 
 
 sheaves 
 
 
 half 
 
 halves 
 
 shelf 
 
 shelves 
 
 "U 
 
 knife 
 
 knives 
 
 thief 
 
 thieves 
 
 
 leaf 
 
 leaves 
 
 wife 
 
 wives 
 
 
 life 
 
 lives 
 
 wolf 
 
 wolves 
 
 "W 
 
 loaf 
 
 loaves 
 
 
 
 f f 
 
 >.tT„ 
 
 tr I'- T- 
 
 All other words, ending in / or fe, follow the general 
 
 rule. 
 
RULES FOR SPELLING. 
 
 210 
 
 ExoEP. 6. — The plural number of the following nouns, is 
 very irregularly formed, 
 
 Man 
 
 men 
 
 woman 
 
 women 
 
 child 
 
 children 
 
 goose 
 
 geese 
 
 OK 
 
 oxen 
 
 mouse 
 
 mice 
 
 louse 
 
 lice 
 
 tooth 
 
 teeth 
 
 foot 
 
 feet 
 
 penny 
 
 pence 
 
 Rule ii. — ^When a word ending in e mute, 
 has a termination added to it, which begins 
 with a vowel, the t mute is dropped : as. 
 
 Wise 
 
 wiser 
 
 desire desirous 
 
 noble 
 
 noblest 
 
 contrive contrivance 
 
 stone 
 
 stony 
 
 arrive arrival 
 
 white 
 
 whiten 
 
 manage manager 
 
 pale 
 
 palish 
 
 place placing 
 
 blame 
 
 blamable 
 
 divide divided 
 
 
 DXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Words ending in ce or ge having ou% or ahU added to them, 
 retain the e mute, to preserve the soft sound of c and g" : as, 
 peace, peaceable ; change, changeable, courage, courageous. 
 
 "Words ending in ce, retain both these letters, when ing or 
 CiKj.z 13 uuuCu °, as, scciu^, ugrcciDg, agrecaijie. 
 
 Words ending in le, change ie into y, before in^ : as die, 
 dying, lie, lying ; tie, tying. 
 
 / 
 
S20 
 
 RULES FOR SPELLING. 
 
 Rule hi.— When a word ending in c mute, 
 has a termination added to it, which begins 
 with a consonant, the c mute is retained : as, 
 
 false falsely falsehood 
 
 fine finely fineness 
 
 improve improvement 
 
 xxcEn 
 Arm% awful 
 due duty 
 true truly 
 whole wholly 
 acknowledge 
 
 Words ending in Ic. preceded by a consonant, omit h, 
 when the termination ly is added: as, idle, idly: noble, no- 
 bly, gentle, gently, instead of idlely, noblely, gentlely. ' 
 
 EuLE IV.— When a termination is added to 
 a word ending in y, preceded by a consonant, 
 the y is changed into i : as, 
 
 Try trial comply 
 
 ' envy envious j ustify 
 
 Happy happier happiest 
 
 carry carrier carrieth 
 
 SXCEPTIOXS. 
 
 
 abridge 
 
 abridgement 
 
 argue 
 
 argument 
 
 judge 
 
 judgement 
 
 lodge 
 
 lodgement 
 
 acknowledgement 
 
 compliance 
 
 justifiable 
 
 happily 
 
 carried 
 
 When ing is added to such words, the y is retained, that 
 the i may not be doubled, as cry, crying, fly, flying. 
 
nULBS FOR SPELLINQ. 
 
 221 
 
 liVords ending in y preceded by a vowel, do Dot change 
 file y into t : as, gay, gayly, play, played, employ, employer. 
 
 When ed or es is added to a word ending in y, it forms but 
 one syllable with the preceding consonants, as try, tried, 
 deny, denies. 
 
 Rule v. — Monosyllables, and words accent- 
 ed on the last syllable, ending with a single 
 consonant preceded by a single vowel, double 
 that consonant, when they take another syl- 
 lable beginning with a vowel : as, fog, foggy ; 
 admit, admittance. 
 
 Thin 
 rob 
 begin 
 forbid 
 
 thinner thinnest thinnish 
 
 robber robbed robbing 
 
 beginner beginneth beginning 
 
 forbidder forbidden forbidding 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 When the additional syllable alters the original accent tBe- 
 «ODsonant is not doubled, as confer, conference, deference-, 
 iofercnee, reference, preference, preferable. 
 
 Words ending in /, preceded by a single vowel, having tcr> 
 miuations added to them, beginning with a vowel generally 
 double the /, whether the last syllable is accented, or ii(^ 
 accented, as 
 
 travel 
 distil 
 
 craveiJCP 
 distiller 
 
 travelled 
 distilled 
 
 travellings 
 distilling;, i 
 
fi22 
 
 RULES FOR SPELLING. 
 
 But in words' with the terrainatioDs ows, we, ist, vmd ity 
 the lis not doubled, as scandalous, moralize, loyalist, mora- 
 lity, except in the following instances, libellous, marvellous, 
 duellist, tranquillity. 
 
 In woolly and woollen, the I though preceded by a diph- 
 thong, is doubled. 
 
 . KuLE VI.— Words ending in double conso* 
 mnts retain both letters when any termina- 
 tion is added, as, ^ 
 
 odd oddest oddly oddness 
 
 stiff stiffest stiffly ' stiffness 
 
 roll roller - rolled rolling 
 
 poi^ess possessor possessed possessing 
 
 i 
 
 fiZCEPTlONS. 
 
 Words ending with double / drop one of those letters, 
 when a termination is added that begins with a consonant, 
 •3 dull, dully, dukess,— fully, fulness,— will, wilful. 
 
 The words illness, shrillness, and stillness, retain the 
 double /, greeably to the general rule. 
 
 Rule VII — Compound words are spelled 
 in, the same manner, as the simple words of 
 which they are formed : as household, horse- 
 man, forenoon, wherein, skylight, glasshouse, 
 telltale, snowball, molehill. : . 
 
RULES FOR SPELLING. 
 
 223 
 
 Wherever 
 candlemas 
 
 EXCEPTIONS. 
 
 Christmas 
 lammas 
 
 martinmas 
 michaelmas 
 
 Words that end with double I frequently omit one Z, when 
 they form parta of comj)ound words, as, 
 
 Also although already fulfil 
 
 almost always chilblain welfare 
 
 In the present state of Eaglish orthography, it would be 
 very difficult, if not impossible, to give precise directions 
 respecting the single or double /, in compound words. * 
 The same difficulty prevails with regard to words having -. 
 the initials, re, un, mis, &q. Uniformity in this point is much 
 to be desird, though it can scarcely be expected. Jf the au- 
 thor were to hazard an opinion on the subject, it Would be, 
 that all compounds, except the preceding incorrigible words 
 undfer the head exceptions, should be spelled with the double 
 I, especially words in hill, mill, and those in which the / is ' 
 preceded by a broad. In most instandes, the sense or the 
 sound, or both, appear to justify this rule, ani the remainder 
 might be defended on the principles of etymology and an^- ■ 
 logy. The opposite scheme, of ma^dng the I single, in com-? 
 pounds, would in many cases, be highly improper : and there 
 are no principles which would direct and warrant a middle 
 course. This opinion derives support from Walker, author, 
 of the very judicious and highly useful Critical pronouncing 
 Dictionary. 
 
 **It is proper to observe, that the termination ful, in de- 
 
 now with 
 
 rivative words, is always spelled 
 page 185. 
 
 ingle /. Seo 
 
:j;i 
 
 I 
 
 i • 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 Exercises on various parts of the Spelling- 
 
 book.* 
 
 CHAPTER 1. 
 Exercises on Part 1. 
 
 Exercises on the first and second chapters. 
 
 Show the vowels in the words, if, ox, us, 
 cat, hen, pig, dog, sun, egg, ink, and. 
 
 Show the vowels in, hand, tell, give, livs, 
 tongs, brush, crust* 
 
 Show the diphthongs in, head, said, guess, 
 friend, been, flood, young. 
 
 Show the consonants in skip, song, plum, 
 grass, spell, thread, build. 
 
 Mention regularly the vowels, diphthongs, 
 and consonants, in the following words : have, 
 silk, gone, dead, touch, snuff, blood, breath,' 
 amell, guilt. 
 
 • The learner is to be exercised ia each chapter, as sooa 
 AS he has passed throucrh the mrtg nf fb-* c.,.«ii:„„ i...i_ .^ 
 which it relates. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 225 
 
 Exercises on the second and third chapters. 
 
 Show the long and the short vowels in the 
 following words : cake, she, hat, set, kind, 
 home, pin, hop, mule, pure, cut, nut, grape, 
 eand, here, best, mice, fish, cold, pond, fume, 
 dust. 
 
 Show the long and the short diphthongs, 
 in the following words : hail, day, head, clean, 
 tree, tread, pie, buy, flood, road, snow, earth, 
 learn, hue, few. 
 
 Exercises on the fourth and fifth chapters. 
 
 Show the middle and the broad vowels and 
 diphthongs in the following words t star, heart, 
 ball, straw, mouse, goose, owl, rook, lark, 
 daw, moon, cloud. 
 
 Exercises on the seventh chapter. 
 
 Show the silent letters in the folio win 
 words : crumb, neck gnat, knee, walk, high, 
 could, WTonir, comb, sien. hn'o-hi:- R^xrnr/i 
 
226 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 ,t 
 
 CHAPTER 2. 
 ,• Exercises on Part II. ' 
 
 I - t 
 
 Which are thei accented syllables, in ttie 
 ^following words? butter, deprive, quarrel, 
 favour, deject, dismiss, thunder, resume, pre- 
 pare, destructive, sausages, intervene, depar- 
 ture, distressful, perpetrate, carelessness, un- 
 concern, contravene. 
 
 Show^ the short syllables in the follovring 
 words, convey, impure, detect, resent, pervert, 
 subsist, mannerly, fanciful, attractive, remain- 
 ing. 
 
 Show the long syllables in these words, 
 relieve, impute, finely, tallow, sincerely, 
 oversee, violate. 
 
 Show the middle vowels and diphthongs in 
 the syllables of these words, barter, largely, 
 heartless, reproof, discharge, untrue, garden- 
 ing, faithfulness, foolery. 
 
 Show the broad vowels and diphthongs in 
 the syllables of these w^ords : faulter, defraud, 
 auburn, abound, wanted, mortar, purloin, 
 bower, roundish, alderman, employer, ap- 
 pointment, '- '-'" ' ' 
 
 Show the mute vowels in the syllables of 
 the following words : pickle, sable, mutton, 
 
 li [Ji 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 k^l 
 
 I 
 
 token, hasten, treason, marble, possible, spec- 
 tacle, fickleness, candlemas, sickening, 
 ^iln the following wbrds, point out thosie 
 which are pronounced as one syllable, and 
 those which are pronounced as two syllables : 
 hoped, waited, bribed, played, wounded, 
 basted, mourned, preached, toasted, stamped, 
 smoked, heated, bended. 
 
 In the following words, mention regularly 
 the accented syllables, the long and short syl- 
 lables, the middle and broad vowels and diph- 
 thongs, and the silent vowels : stammer, of-i 
 fend, prattle, choked, mended, undone, ex- 
 port, retort, fairly, amount, afar, impart, 
 proved, forsaken, fortitude, misinform, scene- 
 ry, disconcert, exalted. 
 
228 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 
 CHAPTER 3. 
 
 Exercises on the rules for spf."- ; r in Part III 
 
 Chapter 19. 
 
 Section 1. 
 
 On the rule for dividing syllables. 
 
 Divide the following words into syllables^ 
 according to the rules at page 207. 
 
 Rule i. Prefer, obey, reward, amuse, away, 
 reason, linen, wagon, manage, imagine, abili- 
 ty. 
 
 Exact, examine, Tixen, ■wagoner,* 
 
 Rule 2. Able, eagle, scruple, degree, re- 
 flect, secret, bestow, respect, despise, descend, 
 — Posture, mustard, custom, distance, dismal, 
 basket, muslin hospital. 
 
 Abroad, ascend, astonish. 
 
 Rule 8. Summer, coffee, danger, certain, 
 carpenter, advantage, entertain. 
 
 * The exercises in the smaller type, correspond to the cx> 
 eeptions iu the same type under the rulee, 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 229 
 
 Rule 4. Pastry, restraint descry, esquire. — 
 Display, distress, ostrich, industry. 
 
 Rule 5. Empty, hackney, chesnut, laugh- 
 ter, huckster, landscape, neighbour. 
 
 Rule 6. Feather, nephew, machine, orphan, 
 mechanic, architect, arithmetic. 
 
 Rule 7. Real, riot, quite, cruel, giant, idea, 
 violet, gradual, punctual, industrious, mayor, 
 flower, coward, shower, voyage. 
 
 Rule 8. Reader, teacher, mended, consider, 
 builder, walker, coming, blessing, rolling, 
 mistake, displease, mocker, tenderest. 
 
 Robber, running, fatted, forbidden. 
 
 Sentences, convinced, mincing, prancer, pacer, oranges, 
 charged, stranger, ranging, partridges. 
 
 Smoker, rider, taking, shaven, wiped, bored, slavish, bru- 
 tish, stupid, supposed, surprised. ^ 
 
 Airy, hairy, steady, sooty, marshy, glossy, windy, misty, 
 rainy, watery. 
 
 Rule 9. Almshouse, windmill, hartshorn, 
 landlord, tradesman, posthorse, footstool. 
 
 delicious, confidential, brasier, cushion, an- 
 cient, soldier, surgeon, patiently. 
 
230 
 
 APPENDIX. 
 
 Section 2. 
 
 On tlie rules respecting the double consonants in 
 primitive words. 
 
 Write or spell the following words accor- 
 ding to the rules at page 213.* 
 
 Rule 1. Staff, stuff, puff, quill, till, fill, 
 guess, bliss, moss, snuff, call, pass. 
 
 Rule 2. Dot, jug, man, fur, rib, pod, ham, 
 pan. 
 
 Add, odd, buzz, bunn, inn, egg. 
 
 Rule S, Proof, chief, meal, feet, school, 
 boat, nourish, trouble, courage, meadow. 
 
 Rule 4. Canal, excel, distil, cor+rol dis- 
 pel, animal, daffodil, cathedral, paraso 
 
 Rule 5. Clever, savage, proverb, e. ^rt, 
 exist. 
 
 Clock, freckle, colic, cambric, hook. 
 
 Rule 6. Pebble, scuffle, smuggle) bottle, 
 dazzle. 
 
 Rule 7. Penny, pretty, bonny, alley, vol- 
 ley. 
 
 Body, lily, money, honey, city, pity. 
 
 * The teacher is to pronounce these words, without the 
 learner's seeing them, at the time they are proposed for his 
 exercise. 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 231 
 
 1 I 
 
 Rule 8. Ladder, liaminer, gfcrret, tippet, 
 follow. 
 
 Proper, cloaet, shadow, spinet, consider. 
 
 Rule 9. Finish, mimic, timid, profit, va-^ 
 nity. 
 
 Attic, horrid, rabbit, skittish, necessity. 
 
 Rule 10. Accent, affect, efface, offend, 
 offer. 
 
 Acute, acid, afar. 
 
 Rule 11. Amaze, catechism, elephant, epi- 
 cure, moderate, paralytic, paradox. 
 
 . Cattle, parrot, ammunition. 
 
 Section 3. 
 
 On the rules respecting derivative words, at page 21'7. 
 
 Rule 1. Write or spell the plural of the 
 following nouns : sea, palace, college, eagle, 
 bear, pound, shop, crab, dog, doll, sheriff, mo- 
 narch. 
 
 1. Box, bass, dish, coach, sash, cross. 
 
 2. Negro, portico, mango, wo, torpedo. 
 
 8. Body, ruby, fancy, injury, apothecary. Valley, monkey 
 joy, play, journey. 
 
 4. Wife, leaf, self, knife, wolf, hal£ 
 
 5. Ox, penny, child, tooth, mouse, woman. 
 
 Rule 2. Join ed and ing, in a proper man- 
 ner, to the following words : fade, hate, wastei- 
 
 nckoii*/! "fTol-nr* Irkrlnrf VAiirimo V»«:>llfitTP- 
 
 ViVOii^, VUIULV^, XV/\t^l^, iVJV/i\_\-, r^\.-^i.'<~/ r \^' 
 
 Rule 3. Join ness, and ly, to the following 
 words : late, like, rude, vile, fierce, polite. 
 
232 
 
 APPENDrX. 
 
 Rule 4. Jiln cs, cth^ and cd, to the following 
 words : try, deny, envy, reply, signify. 
 
 Join ing to the following words ; %, apply, deny, study, 
 cai'i'y, empty. 
 
 Rule 5. Join cd and ing to the following 
 words : wrap, plat, rub, prefer, regret, abhor. 
 
 Ravel, excel, equal, compel, quarrel. 
 
 Rule 6. Join er, cd, and ing to the following 
 words : dress, stroll, scoff, spell, kiss. 
 
 Rule 7. Write or spell the following words : 
 skylark, busybody, foretell, windmill, down- 
 hill, uphill, wellwisher, farewell, holyday. 
 
 Section L 
 
 Promiscuous exercises on the rules and exceptions respecting 
 
 derivative words. 
 
 Write or spell the plurals of the following 
 nouns : umbrella, hero, army, history, dairy, 
 life, sheaf, hoof, mouse, turkey. 
 
 Join ed and ing to the following words: 
 change, inquire, enclose, move, continue, 
 trifle, owe, die, disagree, liurry, fry, obey, 
 employ, vex, sin, commit, visit, benefit, enter, 
 
 inter, differ, dpfpr. irflllnn. ornsjfiir^ mnnfinTi 
 
 quiet, quit, stuff, fill. 
 Join able to the following words : blame, 
 
APPENDIX. 
 
 233 
 
 value, desire, agree, charge, service manage, 
 vary, justify, reason, excuse. 
 
 Join cr to the following words: strange, 
 free, oversee, write, inquire, saddle, cottage, 
 die, cry, buy, visit, wagon, drum, begin, ab- 
 hor, often, mill, jewel, commission. 
 
 Join al iQ the following words : refuse, 
 remove, bury, deny, acquit, addition. 
 
 Join hj to the following words : complete* 
 sole, whole, true, blue, servile, able, genteel. 
 
 Join hj and ncss to the following words; 
 idle, open, dim, sly, busy, cool, slothful, dull 
 stiff, cross, useless, harmless. 
 
 Zom fid to the following words: plenty, 
 fancy, duty, skill, success. 
 
 Join ij to the following words : shade, ease, 
 mud, sun, juioe, noise, star, oil, meal. 
 
 Join en to the following words: forgive, 
 rise, forgot, glad, wood, wool, deaf, stiff. 
 
 Join ish to the following words : late, rogue, 
 hog, sot, prude, fop. 
 
 Join ance to the following words: ally, 
 assure, vary, continue, remit, forbear. 
 
 Join mcnt to the following words : amuse, 
 allot, judge, prefer, acknowledge. 
 
 Join ous to the following words: virtue, 
 melody, poison, libel, vary. 
 

 234 
 
 APPENDIX* 
 
 
 To GIVE variety to the exerciser in spelling, 
 and to prevent a dry and formal mauner of 
 
 Eerforming tliis business, the learner should 
 e frequently directed to spell, vdtliout see- 
 ing the words, the little sentences contained 
 in the appropriate readhig lessons, through- 
 out the book. As these sentences are short, 
 and contain no words that are not in the pre- 
 vious columns, they will probably form some 
 of the most easy and agreeable spelling lessons 
 off the book, which the teacher can propose 
 to his pupil. 
 
 When the learners have performed the 
 exercises on the rules for spelling, they will, 
 it is presumed, be prepared for entering, with 
 advantage, on the study of the author's 
 ♦'Abridgement of his English Grammar.'* 
 He hopes also that the latter chapters of pro- 
 miscuous reading lessons will qualify them 
 for commencing the perusal of his "Introduc- 
 tion to the English Reader," or other books 
 of a similar description. The transition, in 
 both instances, will, he flatters himself, prove 
 a natural and easy gradation. 
 
 THE END. 
 
elling, 
 ner of 
 should 
 it see- 
 tained 
 rough- 
 short, 
 le pre- 
 1 some 
 lessons 
 ropose 
 
 id the 
 y will, 
 r, with 
 Lithor*8 
 Qinar.'* 
 of pro- 
 
 them 
 ;roduc- 
 
 books 
 ion, in 
 , prove